Tank Gauging Manual.pdf

Kongsberg Maritime AS

Kongsberg

FINAL DRAWING K-Gauge GL-300 Tank Gauging System

HMD H2547

KMA project Ref.: i034739 KMA project no.: 673807933

Kongsberg Maritime AS Haakon VII gate 4 N-7041 Trondheim – Norway Phone:+ 4773581000 Fax:+ 4773581001 Sales Office–Horten: P.O.Box 1009,N-3194 Horten, Norway. Phone + 47 33 20 00 Fax: +47 33 04 22 50

Kongsberg Maritime AS Trondheim

System drawings

1

Radar

2

Pressure

3

Temperature

4

DPU

5

Cargo - Cabinet

6

Uninterupted Power Supplies UPS

7

Manuals

8

Kongsberg Maritime AS N-7005 Trondheim, Norway. Haakon VII gate 4 Phone: +47 815 73 700 and +47 815 35 355 Fax: +47 85 02 80 82 E-mail: [email protected] Web: http://www.km.kongsberg.com

Classification approvals

9

Sales office: Kirkegårdsveien 45 P.O. Box 483 NO-3601 Kongsberg Norway. Phone: +47 32 28 50 00 Fax: +47 33 28 50 10 E-mail: [email protected]

Ex-certificates

10

FINAL DRAWING System: K-Gauge GL-300 Tank Gauging System Yard & Newbuilding: Hyundai Mipo Dockyard Co,.Ltd H2547 Ship name: TRF MANDAL Classification society: LR KMA hull ref. no: i034739 KMA project no: 673807933 KMA project resp.: KMK project resp.: H. C. Ku

PROJECT INFORMATION : CUSTOMER

: HMD

SHIP OWNER

: NAVIG8

HULL NO.

: H2547

SHIP KIND

: 37K PRODUCT TANKER

SHIP YARD

: HYUNDAI MIPO DOCKYARD CO., LTD.

CLASS

: LR

DATE

MARK

2013.12.24

P1

2014.05.03

2014.07.09 2015.01.25 2015.02.12 2015.02.12 2015.03.31 2015.03.31 2015.04.13 2015.05.12 2015.05.12 2015.06.24 2015.06.24 2015.07.21 2015.08.12 2015.08.13 2015.09.11 2015.09.15 2015.10.19 2015.11.18

KM Korea Ltd.

P2

DESCRIPTION

Issued for Approval -Making the drawing based on shipyard's POS, KMK Qoutation..

Modification -. Signal for W.B Tank in System configuration is removed by shipyard's comment -. Sensor connection list updated with above accordingly. -. Requested information sheet & Scope of supply updated. Issued for Working Issued for HMD 2511 Final Issued for HMD 2512 Final Issued for HMD 2513 Final Issued for HMD 2514 Final Issued for HMD 2515 Final Issued for HMD 2516 Final Issued for HMD 2517 Final Issued for HMD 2522 Final Issued for HMD 2519 Final Issued for HMD 2520 Final Issued for HMD 2541 Final Issued for HMD 2544 Final Issued for HMD 2521 Final Issued for HMD 2542 Final Issued for HMD 2543 Final Issued for HMD 2545 Final Issued for HMD 2547 Final

DESIGN CHECK APPR. GSS HCK DJS

GSS

HCK

DJS

GSS GSS GSS GSS GSS GSS GSS GSS GSS GSS GSS GSS GSS GSS GSS GSS GSS GSS

HCK HCK HCK HCK HCK HCK HCK HCK HCK HCK HCK HCK HCK HCK HCK HCK HCK HCK

DJS DJS DJS DJS DJS DJS DJS DJS DJS DJS DJS DJS DJS DJS DJS DJS DJS DJS

K-Gauge

Drawing

Rev Proj dwg Rev

Chapter 1 - System drawings K-Gauge GL-300, system configuration. Cable List KM Merchant Marine Safety control drawing and electrical connection of GL-300, system layout Electrical connection diagram for GLH-300 and GCB-300, system layout K-Gauge CLS system, scope of supply list

357834 GL-2513 GL-2641

G C B

Scope of supply Sensor connection list Fuse list Requested Information Spare part list 313545

A

GLA-300 GLA-300/P series types ordering code information and main dimension JIS B2220 5K 200 full face gasket for GLA-300 socket, dimensional sketch Installation of GLA-300/P on tank socket, installation drawing RTG location and free space requirements, installation drawing

GL-2661 UY-149 GL-2630 357752

F C B B

Socket drawing Socket type GL-2522 for GLA-300, dimensional sketch

GL-2522

E

GL-2606

A

GL-2620

B

GL-2621

B

GL-1389 UP-663 UP-539 GL-1387 UP-532

E D C C C

UP-818

B

GT-2090

E

GT-1312

G

GT-2047

B

UG-917

B

K-Gauge CLS system, sensor connection list and tank name overview K-Gauge CLS system, cabinet fuse overview K-Gauge CLS system, tank monitoring request information sheet K-Gauge CLS system, spare part list K-Chief 500 Tank tables and data from customer Chapter 2 - Radar

For installation with flex. prot tubes Inst. utilizing prot. hose on radar tank gauge for cable Ø8-15 and Ø12.5-20.5 and Ø17.0-25.5, assembly drawing GLA-300 prot.hose dim. GLA-300 housing with 2 M32 inlets GL-1389 1 1/4" hose on main cable, GL-1387 3/4" hose on temp. cable, installation drawing GLA-300 prot.hose dim. GLA-300 housing with 2 M32 inlets GL-1389 1 1/4" hose on main cable, GL-1387 3/4" hose on temp. cable, installation drawing Flexible protection tube GL-1389/-, 1 1/4" BSP, dimensional drawing Flange JIS 5K-50A with adapter ISO228-G1 1/4A, detail drawing Flange JIS 5K-40A with adapter ISO228-G1 1/4A, detail drawing Flexible protection tube GL-1387/-, 3/4" BSP, dimensional drawing Flange JIS 5K-40A with adapter ISO228-G 3/4A, detail drawing Common radar installation drawings Mounting order for inserting cable through the cable gland, inst. Dwg Chapter 3 - Pressure Atmospheric pressure measurement Indoor mounting Pressure transmitter, mounted indoor with atmospheric pressure pipe, system layout Pressure transmitter type GT402, dimensional sketch Ballast pump discharge line pressure measurement Ballast pump suction/discharge line, submerged, system layout Connection box for level and pressure measurement. Top mouted installation, IP67, JIS 65 5K interface, dimensional sketch

1299164

B

1299165

C

1299166

F

1299167

B

1299169

B

1299170

A

Pressure transmitter type GT-403, dimensional sketch Shock absorber, detail drawing Installation of shock absorber GT-1244/3 for transmitter type GT402...D and GT403...D in ballast pump suction/discharge systems, installation drawing Flange with PUR-cable, type GT-1504/-, for pressure transmitters GT-403-, dimensional sketch Cable and screen connection for connection box UG-917, installation drawing Installation instructions for GT402 and GT403

GT-1313 GT-1244

H D

GT-1455

C

GT-1504

B

359481 E-2709

C A

For installation with flex. prot tubes Installation utilizing Protection Hose for cable Ø8~15mm Protection hose adapter type GL-2519 for GL-1387 Flexible protection tube GL-1387/-, 3/4" BSP, dimensional drawing Flange JIS 5K-40A with adapter ISO228-G 3/4A, detail drawing

GL-2626 GL-2519 GL-1387 UP-532

A B C C

Cargo manifold line pressure measurement Pressure transmitter GT404 mounted on cargo line, system layout

GT-2040

E

Pressure transmitter GT404 installed on cargo line or similar, installation dwg.

GT-1230

C

Flange type GT-325, dimensional sketch Protection type GT-740, dimensional sketch Pressure transmitter type GT404, dimensional sketch

GT-325 GT-740 GT-1314

Q B F

N2 Gas main line pressure measurement Pressure transmitter GT402 mounted on vapour line, system layout

GT-2045

C

Pressure transmitter GT402 installed on flange installation and replacement.

GT-1227

D

Flange type GT-769, dimensional sketch Protection type GT-740, dimensional sketch Pressure transmitter type GT402, dimensional sketch Installation instructions for GT402 and GT403

GT-769 GT-740 GT-1312 E-2709

B B G A

N2 Gas line pressure measurement for Residual Tank GT402, I.G pressure transmitter Residual Tank, installation drawing Pressure transmitter type GT402, dimensional sketch Adaptor unit type UP-448 for pressure transmitter on tank adapter

BL071 GT-1312 UP-448

A G D

GC-218 GC-222 GC-224 UY-148 MN-1535

H D A B S

GC-224 MN-1535

A S

GC-223

F

GC-218 UY-148

H B

MN-4567

C

353163

B

Chapter 4 - Temperature GC-300 tank temp. for Framo inst. for Cargo & Slop Tank Temperature transmitter box GC-300, dimensional sketch Inst. of GC-300 conn. box with temp. sensors, Framo pump inst., inst. dwg. Cable preparation GC-300, installation dwg. Gasket type UY-148 for temperature sensor unit GC-300, detail dwg. Temperature sensor for oil and gas tanks measuring cable, dim. sketch GC-300 tank temp. for Deck inst. for Residual Tank Cable preparation GC-300, installation dwg Temperature sensor for oil and gas tanks measuring cable, dim. sketch Installation of GC-300-K connection box with temperature sensors, installation dwg. Temperature transmitter box GC-300, dimensional sketch Gasket type UY-148 for temperature sensor unit GC-300, detail dwg. Adapter and protection pipe for temp. sensor type MN-1535 GC-300, installation drawing Adapter for GC-300, JIS25A pipe, detail drawing For installation with flex. prot tubes

Installation utilizing Protection Hose for cable Ø8~15mm Protection hose adapter type GL-2519 for GL-1387 Flexible protection tube GL-1387/-, 3/4" BSP, dimensional drawing Flange JIS 5K-40A with adapter ISO228-G 3/4A, detail drawing

GL-2626 GL-2519 GL-1387 UP-532

A B C C

341712 336081 341707 339779 355509

F A1 B D2 A

364414

A

364416

B

HA452722

M

350012 350006

E B

Chapter 5 - Distributed Processing Units - DPU DPUxe - ATEX / EX(i) interface, connection RAi-16xe, Outline RAi-16xe, Sensor Connection SCU, outline SCU, Termination list, Connection diagram Chapter 6 - Cabinets GL-300 Cargo tank level gauging cabinets GLN-300/24 Cargo Level System, cabinet for max 24 GLK's, with touch screen computer, dimensional sketch GLN-300/24 Cargo Level System, mounting plate inside cabinet for max. 24 GL-300 cabinet for max. 24 SPU's, internal connection diagram GL-300 UPS and fuse distribution drawing, power distribution DPU’s in cabinet, Internal Connection 13.3" IPC Touch screen Computer 13" IPC, Touch Screen Computer, outline AIPC, AIPC-XXL, IPC & IPC KCC, connection Serial Interface Modbus protocol list Chapter 7 - Uninterrupted Power Supplies - UPS Eaton 9130-M 3kVA, 230VAC/230VAC, outline

334381

I

gl300in_dm gl300_fe 385541 gl300_de

D G B E

Chapter 8 - Manuals GL-300, installation guide GL-300, users manual Kongsberg K-Gauge CLS Cargo Level System, operator manual GL-300, installation manual Chapter 9 - Classification approvals Type approval cert' KR Type approval Cert'

OSL04968AC005

Chapter 10 - Ex-certificates GLA-300. Tank radar sensor GLK-300. Radar processor unit MN-1535. Temperature sensor GT400 Series Pressure transmitter GC-300 Temperature transmitter DZ-110 Active safety barrier

09ATEX1132X 09ATEX1128X 82.004X 02ATEX119X 09ATEX1133 EX98D216

1299171 1299172

A A

1337359

B

CHAPTER 1

System Configuration

CABLE LIST, KM MERCHANT MARINE

CABLE NAME W006 W006 W007 W008 W010 W011 W012 W015 W016 W017 W019 W024 W024 W024 W024 W024 W024 W025 W025 W025 W025 W025 W025 W028 W029 W030 W033 W033 W050 W050 W060 W061 W062 W063 W064 W065 W066 W071 W072 W081 W083 W082 W090

FROM UNIT NAME INPUT/CRP, X4 (USB A) USB OS, TCP INPUT/CRP, X2 EATON 9130-M, Battery Connector SOCKET WALL - MALE SCU A, A1 SCU A, B1 MOUSE EXT CABLE KEYBOARD EXT. CABLE PC, VGA ACP, P6 PC n0. 1, NET A PC no. 1, NET A PC no. 1, CAN NET PC no. 1, NET C SWITCH A SWITCH A PC no. 2, NET B PC no. 2, NET B PC no. 2, CAN NET PC no. 2, NET C SWITCH B SWITCH B PC,Display DVI cable convertion PC, CRP (USB A) PC, COM PC, COM PC, USB PC, USB LTU, X1 ESS, X4 LTU/ACP ESS, X1 LEVER, P1 ESS DSUB PLUG, P1 ESS, X1/P4 MANUAL LEVER, J1 MANUAL LEVER, J2 RPMD BOX, DPU, X1 RPMD BOX, DPU, X1 RPMD BOX, DPU, X1 CONNECTION BOX UG-920, FORK 1/2

Doc no: 357834G CO15940

TO TERM PLUG PLUG SCREW PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG SCREW PLUG SCREW PLUG PLUG PL/SCR. PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG

UNIT NAME

TERM

ALC, X3 (USB B) TCP, X3 (USB B) TCP, X2 EATON Battery Pack, Battery Connector SOCKET CONSUMER - FEMALE SCU B, A2 SCU B, B2

TCP, VGA OPU, P1 PC no. 1, NET A SWITCH A SCU A, ETH2 TOS, U20 PRINTER A GLK-300, P1 PC no. 2, NET B SWITCH B SCU B, ETH2 TOS, U20 PRINTER B GLK-300, P2 DVI cable convertion DISPLAY, DVI CRP/INPUT, X3 (USB B) CONVERTER RS232-485/RS422 OR PC, COM CONVERTER COM/LAN PRINTER KVM DPU - ESS, X4 ESS, P4 ACP X1 ANA IN LIFI DSUB PLUG, P1 LEVER TERMINAL, X2 LIFI DSUB PLUG, P1/P2 INC. (IN COMMAND BREAKER) TERMINAL SHH, X1 TERMINAL SHH, X2 RPM DETECTORS RPM DETECTORS RPM DETECTORS LED FORK NQB101

PLUG PLUG SCREW PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG SCREW PLUG SCREW PLUG SCREW PLUG SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW PLUG

CABLES LENGHT 1M 3M 1M 0,5M MISC. 3M 3M 2M 2M 2M 2,5M 3M 3M 3M 3M 3M 0,5M 3M 3M 3M 3M 3M 0,5M 0.20M 1.75M 3M 3,0M 3,0M 3M 3M 2,5M 2,0M 0,5M 2,4M 3M 0,15M 2,5M 3.0M 3.0M 10M 10M 10M --

FIND IN DRAWING CHAPTER

SIGNALS TYPE

305949 305949 305949 334394 MISC. NA NA None None 327997 342670 366381 366381 366381 366381 366381 366381 366381 366381 366381 366381 366381 366381 327997 327997 327997 HA462829

SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL POWER POWER DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL

HA455421 HA455421 329395 329395 357882 344029 344035 341580 344028 HA462401 HA462401 HA465013 HA465013 HA465013 355576

W00-99 KM MERCHANT MARINE SUPPLY W100-> YARD SUPPLY

1,2 1,2 1,2 10,4 N/A 6,5 6,5 N/A N/A 6,1 6,3 6,5 6,5 6,5 6,5 6,5 6,5 6,5 6,5 6,5 6,5 6,5 6,5 6,1 6,1 6,1 12 12 6,4 6,4 3,1 3,1 3,1 3,1 3,1 3,1 3,1 3,1 3,1 5 5 5 1

REMARKS / REQOMMENDATIONS USB 2.0 USB 2.0 Light Intensity Control ENEC STD 230VAC STRAIGHT CABLE CAT6(S/FTP) STRAIGHT CABLE CAT6(S/FTP)

VGA cable SERIE CROSSED CABLE CAT5e(S/FTP) STRAIGHT CABLE CAT5e(S/FTP) STRAIGHT CABLE CAT5e(S/FTP) STRAIGHT CABLE CAT5e(S/FTP) STRAIGHT CABLE CAT5e(S/FTP) INSIDE CARGO CABINET CROSSED CABLE CAT5e(S/FTP) STRAIGHT CABLE CAT5e(S/FTP) STRAIGHT CABLE CAT5e(S/FTP) STRAIGHT CABLE CAT5e(S/FTP) STRAIGHT CABLE CAT5e(S/FTP) INSIDE CARGO CABINET

USB 2.0

USB 2.0 cable A-B, for MP7900 see dwg. 327997 USB 2.0 MAX 0.3M BETWEEN ESS/X1-K1

TO LIFI 70/80/90/120/150 CABLE SPLIT DSUB ESS, LIFI HANDLE/LIFI 70/80/90/120 ESS X1/P4

MECH. PROT. NEEDED(BY ENG.MAKER) MECH. PROT. NEEDED(BY ENG.MAKER) MECH. PROT. NEEDED(BY ENG.MAKER) 3,5 or 10M KM SUPPLY

Page 1 of 5

CABLE LIST, KM MERCHANT MARINE

CABLE NAME W101 W107 W108 W109 W110 W111 W112 W122 W123 W123 W124 W124 W124 W124 W124 W125 W125 W125 W125 W125 W125 W125 W126 W126 W126 W126 W127 W127 W127 W127 W128 W129 W130 W131 W132 W133 W135 W136 W137 W138 W139 W150 W151 W152 W153

FROM UNIT NAME TOS, X20 UPS, 220VAC YARD POWER POS, X10/ UPS POWER WCU, X1-U7 SCU n, A1 SCU n, B1 TOS, X20 (OS1) FIREWALL, X1 COM/LAN, X1 SWITCH A SWITCH A PC n, CAN NET PC n, NET A SCU n, A1 SWITCH B SWITCH B SWITCH B SWITCH B PC n, CAN NET PC n, NET B SCU n, B1 PC n, NET C SCU A, ETH1 PC no. X NET C SCU A, ETH1 PC n, NET C SCU B, ETH1 PC n, NET C SCU B, ETH1 SWITCH A SWITCH B BUZZER, X1 BUZZER, X1 BUZZER, X1 PC, COM BW INDICATOR, X1 ACP, X1 ACP, X1 DPU-MEI TERMINAL BOARD SSH, X1/X2 DPU (DI), X1 DPU (DI), X1 DPU (DI), X1 DPU (DO), X1

Doc no: 357834G CO15940

TO TERM SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW PLUG PLUG SCREW SOCKET SOCKET PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG --SCREW SCREW SCREW PLUG SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW

UNIT NAME

TERM

WBU / WCU, X10 PC, POWER / GLN-300, U1 WBU, X10 (U4) WCS UNITS, X10 (U3) FIRE SENTRAL SCU n+1, A2 SCU n+1, B2 TOS, X21 (OS2) ADMIN NETWORK/SERVER External PC, LAN PC NET A PRINTER SCU A, ETH2 KVM SCU n+1 A2 PC NET B SERVER FLEET MANAGEMENT PRINTER FIREWALL SCU B, ETH2 KVM SCU n+1 B2 Cargo cabinet GLN-300, SW1 Cargo cabinet GLN-300, SW1 Cargo cab. GLN100/886, RCU502, P8 Ethernet connection Cargo cabinet GLN-300, SW2 Cargo cabinet GLN-300, SW2 Cargo cab. GLN100/886, RCU502, P9 ETHERNET CONNECTION PC NET A/SWITCH A PC NET B/SWITCH B WCS UNITS - X10 (U3) ACP, X1 ESS-X4 PC, COM DIMMER BOX REV.COUNTER HOUR RUN COUNTER CHANGE OVER SWITCH SPEED SET HANDLE P1/P2 (LF 180S-01.06) ON/OFF UNIT RESET UNIT WH SYSTEM ON UNIT ENGINEER FITNESS SYSTEM, ROT. LIGHT

SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SOCKET SOCKET SCREW SOCKET SOCKET PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG --SCREW SCREW SCREW PLUG SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW PLUG SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW

CABLES LENGHT

-------

------

------------------

FIND IN DRAWING CHAPTER

SIGNALS TYPE

REMARKS / REQOMMENDATIONS

HA464552 331466 HA464552 HA464552 HA464552 NA NA HA464552 366381 366381 366381 366381 366381 366381 366381 366381 366381 366381 366381 366381 366381 366381 366381 366381 366381 366381 366381 366381 366381 366381 None None HA464552 HA462767 HA462355 HA462829 348546 HA451693 HA450495

2 10-4 1,2 1,2 1,2 6,5 6,5 1,2 6 1,2 6 6 6,5 6,5 6 6 6

DATA POWER POWER POWER SIGNAL DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA

1 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN 2 x 1.5mm² Power#2 from another source, galvanic isolated Power#1 from W/H POS or UPS 1 PAIR Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 6(S/FTP), MAX 100 M. Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 6(S/FTP), MAX 100 M. 1 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M. 1 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M. Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M. Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M. Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M. Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M. Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M. Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M.

6,5 6,5 6,5 6 6,5 6,5 6,5 6,5 6,5 6,5 6,5 6,5

HA462401 HA460743 HA460743 HA460743 HA460743

3,1 4 4 4 4

DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL DATA SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL POWER

Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M. Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M. Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M. Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M. Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M. Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M. Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M. Other Ethernet Network, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M. Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M. Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M. Plug RJ45 KM supply, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M. Other Ethernet Network, CAT 5e(S/FTP), MAX 100 M. SC connection needed in each end Fibre Optic cable SC connection needed in each end Fibre Optic cable 1 PAIR 1 PAIR, 24VDC EXTERNAL SUPPLY 1 PAIR, 24VDC ESS RELAY ULNIT (K1 14/24) 2x2x0,5 TWIST PAIR W/BRAIDED SCREEN RS232, max 15m 10K POT CABLE GLAND PG 13,5 and PG16 1x2x0,75mm2 (24VDC SUPPLY FROM ACP X10, see HA468364) 1x2x0,75mm2 (BUILD IN BATTERY) 1 PAIR 2 Cable with D-sub connectors Min 5x0.5, ENGINEER FITNESS SYSTEM Min 2 or 4x0.5, ENGINEER FITNESS SYSTEM or Stand Alone Min 3x0.5, ENGINEER FITNESS SYSTEM Min 1.5, ENGINEER FITNESS SYSTEM

W00-99 KM MERCHANT MARINE SUPPLY W100-> YARD SUPPLY

1,2 11,2 3,1 12 2,2 11,2 11,2

Page 2 of 5

CABLE LIST, KM MERCHANT MARINE

CABLE NAME

FROM UNIT NAME

TO TERM

UNIT NAME

TERM

CABLES LENGHT

FIND IN DRAWING CHAPTER

SIGNALS TYPE

4 4 4 4 4 4 4,3 4,4 3,1 4,4 4,4 3,1 4,4 4,4 4,4 4,4 14 14 14 4,2 4,2 4,2 4,2 4,2 4 5 4,3

SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL POWER POWER POWER POWER SIGNAL POWER SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL

8 8 8 8 8 8

DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA

W150 W151 W152 W153 W154 W155 W160 W162 W163 W164 W165 W166 W167 W168 W169 W170 W172 W173 W174 W175 W176 W177 W178 W179 W180 W181 W182 W183 W184 W185 W186 W187 W189 W190 W188 W189 W190

Stand alone (DI), X1 Stand alone (DI), X1 Stand alone (DI), X1 Stand alone (DO), X1 DPU (DI), X1 DPU (DO), X1 WECS 9520 -MCP, X10 TERMINAL ESS-X4 (term. 9 - 12) (W/H) ESS, X10 5(+)/3(-) TERMINAL ESS-X4 (term. 9 - 12) (W/H) TERMINAL ESS-X4 (W/H) DPU - MEI DPU - ESU (CABINET E10) DPU - ESU (CABINET E10) CPP BACK-UP BRIDGE CPP BACK-UP ECR RPM HANDLE, X1 DPU - MEI, X1 SWITCH AUTO/MANUEL ECR CABINET ECU, X1 CONTROL UNIT AUX. BLOWER IPU PANEL, X1 TERMINAL TBX TERMINAL TBX LCP E25 DPU - RPME, X1 (U2) 011/014 DPU - RPME, X1 (U2) 011/014 CPP THRUSTER CAB CPP THRUSTER CAB CPP THRUSTER CAB CPP THRUSTER CAB CPP THRUSTER CAB CPP AZIMUTH THRUSTER CAB CPP AZIMUTH THRUSTER CAB CPP AZIMUTH THRUSTER CAB CPP AZIMUTH THRUSTER CAB CPP AZIMUTH THRUSTER CAB

SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW

ON/OFF UNIT RESET UNIT WH SYSTEM ON UNIT ENGINEER FITNESS SYSTEM, ROT. LIGHT Stand Alone, X1 Stand Alone, X1 E90 (Shipyard interface box) BWU 09, XBW 1/2 ESSX4 1/2 BWU 09, XBW 1/2 TERMINAL ESS-X4 ((ECR) TERMINAL BOARD SSH, X1/X2 TERMINAL ESS-X4 (term 5 -12)(ECR) EMCY. STOP SWITCH (ER) CPP TERMINAL, X1 (CPP CAB.) CPP TERMINAL, X1 (CPP CAB.) DPU-MEI, X1 CPP CONTROL SYSTEM, X1 DPU - MEI, X1 TERMINAL AUX BLOWER, X1 TERMINAL AUX BLOWER, X1 TERMINAL AUX BLOWER, X1 SPP, X1 DPU - ESS-X2 AUX BLOWER CONTROL DPU - ESU, X1 CABINET E10, XE10 CPP CONTROL UNIT RR CPP CONTROL UNIT KAWAZAKI CPP CONTROL UNIT LIPS CPP CONTROL UNIT ABB CPP CONTROL UNIT VT 3000/REXROTH CPP/ROTATION CONTROL UNIT AZI RR CPP/ROTATION CONTROL UNIT AZI KAWAZAKI CPP/ROTATION CONTROL UNIT AZI KAMEWA CPP/ROTATION CONTROL UNIT AZI ABB CPP/ ROTATION AZIMUT CLOSED LOOP

SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW

--------------------------------

HA460743 HA460743 HA460743 HA460743 HA458823 HA458823 HA349117 HA462357 HA462355 HA462357 HA462357 HA463146 HA462357 HA462357 357588 357588 SeaMate SeaMate SeaMate HA463656 HA463656 HA463656 HA461556 HA461556 HA338221 HA462340 313845 Remarks Remarks Remarks Remarks Remarks Remarks Remarks Remarks Remarks Remarks

W203 W203 W204 W204 W203 W204

DPU 1X8/X8, CAN1 DPU 2X8/X8, CAN1 DPU 1X9/X9, CAN2 DPU 1X9/X9, CAN2 DPU 2X8, PROCESS NET DPU 2X9, PROCESS NET

SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW

DPU X8, CAN1 DPU X8, CAN1 DPU X9, CAN2 DPU X9, CAN2 DPU 2X8, PROCESS NET DPU 2X9, PROCESS NET

SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW

-------

354338 Coming 354338 Coming 354337 354337

Doc no: 357834G CO15940

W00-99 KM MERCHANT MARINE SUPPLY W100-> YARD SUPPLY

REMARKS / REQOMMENDATIONS For Stand alone Min 5x0.5, ENGINEER FITNESS SYSTEM For Stand alone Min 2 or 4x0.5, ENGINEER FITNESS SYSTEM For Stand alone Min 3x 0.5, ENGINEER FITNESS SYSTEM For Stand alone System Min 1.5 For Stand alone System Min 1.5, activation from Alarm system For Stand alone System Min 1.5, alarm to Alarm system 1x2x1,5mm² 24VDC min. 1x2x1,5mm² EM'CY STOP 1x2x1,5mm² 24VDC supply to ESSX4 min. 1x2x1,5mm² EM'CY STOP Min. 3x2x1,5mm² EM'CY STOP Min. 11x0.5mm² with braded screen Min. 4x2x1,5mm² EM'CY STOP min. 1x2x1,5mm² EM'CY STOP 6X0,5mm² 6X0,5mm² 2-4 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN 2-4 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN 1x2x0,75mm² 3x1,5mm² 8x2x1,5mm² 14x2x1,5mm² 10x2x1,0mm² 5x2x0,75mm² With Braided screen 2x2x0,75mm² 2x2x0,75mm² Pending product department Pending product department Pending product department Pending product department Pending product department Pending product department Pending product department Pending product department Pending product department Pending product department 1 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN 1 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN 1 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN 1 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN 1 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN 1 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN

Page 3 of 5

CABLE LIST, KM MERCHANT MARINE

CABLE NAME

FROM UNIT NAME

TO TERM

UNIT NAME

TERM

CABLES LENGHT

W205

DGU X8L / SCU 1X8

SCREW UG-890, TERMINAL 4-5 / 9-10

SCREW

--

W206 W207 W208 W209 W210 W212 W222 W223 W223 W229 W230 W231 W232 W233 W234 W235 W236 W237

WECS 9520 -MCP, X8 CABINET E25, X8/X9 CABINET E25, X8/X9 WECS 9520 E90 DPU (DO), X1 WECS 9520 -MCP, X1 DPU, X7/1X7/2X7 DGU, 1X7/2X7 DGU, 1X7/2X7 POWER SUPPLY UPS 24 VDC POWER SUPPLY UPS 24 VDC POWER SUPPLY UPS/PSO/PSO-P PSO-P1, 1X10 PSO-P2, 1X10 PSO-P1, 2X10 PSO-P2, 2X10 PSO-P3, 1X10 PSO-P3, 2X10

SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW

SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW

----

W238

SWITCH BOARD (SUPPLY 1)

SCREW POWER SUPPLY UPS, X1

SCREW

--

W239

SWITCH BOARD (SUPPLY 2)

SCREW POWER SUPPLY UPS, X2 / U2

SCREW

--

W240 W241 W242 W243

ESB, 24V SUPPLY MSB, 230V SUPPLY CARGO CABINET, X10 CARGO CABINET, FX10

SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW

SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW

W244

DGU X10 / SCU X10

SCREW UG-890, TERMINAL 2-3 / 7-8

SCREW

W300 W302 W303 W304 W305 W306 W307 W308 W309 W320 W321 W322 W323 W324

TBX TERMINAL SS-X40 TBX TERMINAL DPU RAo-8, X1 (BRIDGE) DPU RAo-8, X1 (ECR) DPU MEI, X1 DPU RAi, X1 DPU ESU, X1 DPU C2, X1 Backup panel ECR,BP-X1 Backup panel Eng.room Backup panel Eng.room MEI MEI

SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW

SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW

Doc no: 357834G CO15940

E90 WEC59520 E90 E90 MPP, X8 ROT. LIGHT, KLAXON AUX BLOWER CABINET SERIAL INTERFACE ACTUATOR, X7 SERIAL INTERFACE RS422 PSO, 1X10 PSO, 2X10 DPU, X10 / OPU / U1 / U2 POWER SUPPLY FOR CABINET 1 POWER SUPPLY FOR CABINET 1 POWER SUPPLY FOR CABINET 3 POWER SUPPLY FOR CABINET 3 POWER SUPPLY FOR CABINET 1 POWER SUPPLY FOR CABINET 3

SEFA 160, X10 SEFA 800/1200, X10 CARGO CABINET FX10 (FUSES) CARGO CABINET X1,X2,X3 SW1-8

DPU - ESU/C2, ECU, SENSOR RPM INDICATOR, X1 DPU - ESU/C2, ECU, SENSONR INSTRUMENTS - BRIDGE W & C INSTRUMENTS - ECR M.E. CONN. BOX/SENSORS M.E. SLD SENSORS M.E. SHD SENSORS REV./ HOUR COUNTER DPU MEI, X1 DPU C2#1 DPU ESU, X1 CLU-3 E10

---

----------

---------------

FIND IN DRAWING CHAPTER 354338 & 353393 HA349117 Wärtsila Wärtsila Wärtsila SeaMate HA349117 341704 HA462521 HA462521 HA461629 HA461629 HA461629 HA461629 HA461629 HA461629 HA461629 HA461629 HA461629 HA462905 or 347544 HA462905 or 347544 332126 332126 335899 335899 HA461629 & 353393 HA464124 HA463834 HA464209 SEAMATE SEAMATE SEAMATE SEAMATE SEAMATE SEAMATE SEAMATE SEAMATE SEAMATE SEAMATE SEAMATE

W00-99 KM MERCHANT MARINE SUPPLY W100-> YARD SUPPLY

SIGNALS TYPE

REMARKS / REQOMMENDATIONS

8

DATA

4

14 4,3 8 4,5 4,5 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

DATA SIGNAL SIGNAL DATA SIGNAL SIGNAL DATA DATA DATA POWER POWER POWER POWER POWER POWER POWER POWER POWER

1 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN 1 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN, WECS 1 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN, WECS 1 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN Min. 2 x 1.5 2x2x0,75mm² 2 or 4 x 0.5 TWIST PAIR W/BRAIDED SCREEN 3 pair 0.75 TWISTED PAIR W/BRAIDED SCHREEN 3 pair 0.75 TWISTED PAIR W/BRAIDED SCHREEN 2 x 6.0 2 x 6.0 2x2.5mm² 2x2x2.5mm² 2x2x2.5mm² 2x2x2.5mm² 2x2x2.5mm² 2x2x2.5mm² 2x2x2.5mm²

1 TWIST PAIR WITH BRAIDED SCREEN

10

POWER

230VAC, ( i.e MSB 1 )

10

POWER

230VAC, ( i.e MSB 2 / ESB )

4,5 4,5 9,3,1 9,3,1

POWER POWER POWER POWER

2x4.0m2 (24VDC, 20A) 3x2.5m2 with PE EARTH (230VAC, 16A) 2x1 min.2.5mm² 2x1 min.1.5mm²

9,3,1

POWER

2x1 min. 2.5mm²

4,2 11 4,2 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14

SIGNALS SIGNALS SIGNALS SIGNALS SIGNALS SIGNALS SIGNALS SIGNALS SIGNALS SIGNALS SIGNALS SIGNALS SIGNALS SIGNALS

13 x 1.0 (ECU006-15) 2 X 0.5, DIMMER FUNCTION 17 x 1.0 (ECU005) MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm² w/ IND.SCREEN MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm² w/ IND.SCREEN MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm² w/ IND.SCREEN MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm² w/ IND.SCREEN MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm² w/ IND.SCREEN MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm² w/ IND.SCREEN MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm² w/ IND.SCREEN MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm² w/ IND.SCREEN MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm² w/ IND.SCREEN MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm² w/ IND.SCREEN MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm² w/ IND.SCREEN

Page 4 of 5

CABLE LIST, KM MERCHANT MARINE

CABLE NAME

FROM UNIT NAME

TO TERM

UNIT NAME

TERM

CABLES LENGHT

Aux.bl 1 cab. Aux.bl 2 cab. E10 E10 E28

SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW

------

W325 W326 W327 W328 W329

C2#1 C2#1 C2#1 ESU Rai 16

SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW

W330

GL-7A

SCREW Z972 or other suitable zener barrier

SCREW

W331 W333 W334 W335

Backup panel Eng.room C2#2 GLK-300, X2 GLA-300, X202

SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW

SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW

W336

GT402, GT403, GT404, GC 103

SCREW DZ-110, Rai or other

SCREW

W337 W338

IS-BAR & PE-BAR in cargo cabinet GLK-300, X1.3

SCREW Ship's Hull SCREW IS-BAR

SCREW SCREW

W339

MN-1995

SCREW Z954, Rai or other

SCREW

W340 W341 W342 W343 W344 W345 W346 W347 W348

DPU-CPP, C2 module, back-up, ECR DPU-CPP, C2 module, back-up, ECR DPU-CPP, C2 module, back-up, ECR DPU-CPP, C2 module, back-up, ECR DPU-CPP, C2 module, back-up, ECR DPU-CPP, C2 module, back-up, ECR DPU-CPP, C2 module, back-up, ECR DPU-CPP, C2 module, back-up, ECR DPU-CPP, C2 module, back-up, ECR

SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW

CPP, back-up, BU-X1, Bridge CPP, back-up, BU-X1, Bridge CPP, back-up, ECR-X1, ECR CPP, back-up, ECR-X1, ECR CPP, Servo unit ASP12, J2 CPP, Servo unit ASP12, J3 CPP, back-up, BU-X1, Bridge CPP, back-up, ECR-X1, ECR CPP, Servo / Control unit

SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW

W400 W401 W402 W403 W404 W405

DPU-DGU, X8L + X10 Bearing wear, end of Can Bus A RTIxe/SIUxe, X1 SIU, X1 UG-890 / CANopen T-piece, CAN + POWER CANopen T-piece, CAN + POWER

SCREW PLUG SCREW SCREW PLUG PLUG

UG-890 WaterInOil, MMT330-8BA/C CONNECTION BOX UG-920,X1 358667 Connection box for GT-26 CANopen T-piece PS 11 SENSOR

W406

CANopen T-piece, CAN + POWER

W410 W411 W412 W413 W414

GLK-100A, X81 AL-100B/EXRP, COMM/POWER AL-100A/18EX, COMM/POWER AL-100A/18EX, INP 1->3 AL-100A/18EX, INP 4->7

SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW

DPU X8, X9

SCREW None

T

Doc no: 357834G CO15940

PLUG

DPU C2#2 E10 GLA-300, X1 GC-300, X4

GN14 / GB200 GLA-100/5 AL-100A/18EX, COMM/POWER AL-100A/18EX, COMM/POWER UG-855 UG-855

---

FIND IN DRAWING CHAPTER

SIGNALS TYPE

SEAMATE SEAMATE SEAMATE SEAMATE SEAMATE

14 14 14 14 14

SIGNALS SIGNALS SIGNALS SIGNALS SIGNALS

GL-2379

1,5

SIGNALS

SEAMATE SEAMATE GL-2641 GL-2641

14 14 1,1 1,1

SIGNALS SIGNALS SIGNALS SIGNALS

341707 or 341712(Ex) GL-2641 GL-2641

8

SIGNALS

1,1 1,1

EARTH EARTH

REMARKS / REQOMMENDATIONS MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm² w/ IND.SCREEN MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm² w/ IND.SCREEN MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm² w/ IND.SCREEN MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm² w/ IND.SCREEN MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.11x0,5mm² w/ IND.SCREEN

2 Twist pairs w/braided screen, min.0.5² if only 1 switch 4 Twist pairs w/braided screen, min.0.5² if 2 switches MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.1x0,5mm² w/ IND.SCREEN MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.2x0,5mm² w/ IND.SCREEN

1 Twist pair w/braided screen, min.0.5², 4-20mA Earth cable min. 16mm² Earth cable min. 1.0mm²

341707 or 341712(Ex)

8

SIGNALS

2 Twist pairs w/braided screen, min.0.5², PT100 elem. 3 wires

----------

Remarks Remarks Remarks Remarks Remarks Remarks Remarks Remarks Remarks

4,4 4,4 4,4 4,4 4,4 4,4 4,4 4,4 4,4

SIGNALS SIGNALS SIGNALS SIGNALS SIGNALS SIGNALS SIGNALS SIGNALS SIGNALS

4 x 0,5 SQUARE, DWG PENDING PRODUCT DEPARTMENT 4 x 0,5 SQUARE, DWG PENDING PRODUCT DEPARTMENT 4 x 0,5 SQUARE, DWG PENDING PRODUCT DEPARTMENT 4 x 0,5 SQUARE, DWG PENDING PRODUCT DEPARTMENT 4 x 0,5 SQUARE, DWG PENDING PRODUCT DEPARTMENT 4 x 0,5 SQUARE, DWG PENDING PRODUCT DEPARTMENT 6 x 0,5 SQUARE, DWG PENDING PRODUCT DEPARTMENT 6 x 0,5 SQUARE, DWG PENDING PRODUCT DEPARTMENT 8 x 1,5 SQUARE, DWG PENDING PRODUCT DEPARTMENT

SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW PLUG PLUG

-------

1,2 1,2 8 1,6 1 1

PLUG

--

SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW

------

UX-808 UX-808 355516 358638 UX-808 UX-808/UX-788 UX808/GB10 88/GN-056 366523 366524 366524 366526 366526 None

N/A

W00-99 KM MERCHANT MARINE SUPPLY W100-> YARD SUPPLY

1 1 1 1 1 1

ER CANopen Bulk Cable,AWG20, AWG16 w/ IND.SCREEN ER CanOpen Cable 7/8" male - open ended ER MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.4x0,5mm² w/ BRAID.SCREEN ER MULTICABLE,TWIST PAIR min.2x0,5mm² w/ IND.SCREEN ER Canopen cable 7/8" male - 7/8" female SIGNAL+POWE CANopen cable M12-M12 SIGNAL+POWERCANopen cable M12 male - open ended ER ER ER SIGNALS SIGNALS 120ohm

MULTICABLE 4 PAIR min.0,75mm², COMMON SCREEN MULTICABLE 2 PAIR min.0,75mm², COMMON SCREEN MULTICABLE 2 PAIR min.0,75mm², COMMON SCREEN MULTICABLE 7 PAIR min.0,75mm², COMMON SCREEN MULTICABLE 10 PAIR min.0,75mm², COMMON SCREEN RESISTOR, TERMINATOR CAN NETWORK

Page 5 of 5

Type of file Type of system Yard and nb. Ship name KM ref.

Scope of supply K-Gauge GL-300 / Tank Gauging System HMD H2547 TRF MANDAL i034739

Item name

Project responsible: H.C.Ku Order no.: Revision: C Revision date & sign: 2013.12.24 GSS 2014.05.03 GSS 2015.01.25 GSS Item number

Quantity

Remark

GLN-300 floor mount cabinet

334364

1.00

Color : RAL 7032

ADHESIVE BADGE 60X60mm KONGSBERG LOGO

6771-002.0002

1.00

(KMCJ supply)

BRACKET FOR EART BAR SH1PA 2998,6 CAW

7390-011.0002

17.00

(KMCJ supply)

SIGNAL PROCESSING UNIT***ATEX Product***

GLK-300

17.00

TBUS Contact ME 17,5,1,5/ 5-ST-3,81 KMGYPhoenixnr. 2713645.

704033

30.00

PLUGG,PC-KLEMME 1803604 MC1,5/5-ST-3,81

7367-014.0005

2.00

RSupport200

302248

6.00

Fan housing for GLK-300. Double, for 2 pcs GLK-300

341236

8.00

Fan housing for GLK-300. Single, for one GLK-300

343893

1.00

Axial Fan 40x40x20mm. Sanyo Denki - 109P0424D601

343887

6.00

FL Switch SFNT 8TX RJ45 Unmanaged Phoenix swith

363209

3.00

PLUG VS-08-RJ45-5-Q/IP20

316865

2.00

RAi-16xe Module

329714

2.00

ZENER BARRIER 4-20mA

DZ-110

20.00

Power, QUINT-PS/1AC/24DC/20Phoenix Part No. 2866776

326574

2.00

Fuse FAZ-C 6A 2-pole

362419

2.00

13.3" Touch screen Computer with Dure Core CPU

349998

1.00

SCU module

329785

1.00

350089

1.00

K-Gauge GL-300, ACCOMMODATION (MAIN CABINET)

K-Gauge GL-300, ACCOMMODATION (MAIN CABINET) UPS EATON 3KVA 220VAC complete

K-Gauge GL-300, ACCOMMODATION(Atmospheric pressure measring)

Cable out-diameter : 12.7 mm

PRESS.TRANSM.0,8-1,4B ABS.0,Car

GT402A4C0,6V

1.00

Inst. Kit atmospheric pressure transmitter

GT-2092

1.00

Nameplate

E-2660

1.00

1 of 4

Item name

Item number

Quantity

Remark

K-Gauge GL-300, EQUIPMENT ON DECK(GLA-300/P Type Radar) GLA-300/P Prot. Hose M32/M20

Ref. D-GL-2661

GLA-300/P113PJ

8.00

Main : 21.1 mm / Temp : 12.1 mm For No.1~7 Cargo TK(P) & Slop TK(S)

GLA-300/P Prot. Hose M32/M20

Ref. D-GL-2661

GLA-300/P131PJ

8.00

Main : 21.1 mm / Temp : 12.1 mm For No.1~7 Cargo TK(S) & Slop TK(P)

INS-GLA-300

16.00

UY-149-2 is applied

Installation kit for GLA-300 Straight adapter for GLA-300/P

GL-2521

16.00

Length is 700 mm for No.1 ~ 7 Cargo Tank(P/S) & Slop Tank(P/S)

Flexible Cable Protection Tube with flange 1 1/4JIS 5K-50A

GL-1389/xxx

7.00

For No.1~7 Cargo TK(P) / Refer to attached page.

Flexible Cable Protection Tube with flange 1 1/4”

GL-1389/xxx

9.00

Refer to attached page.

Flexible Cable Protection Tube with flange 3/4”

GL-1387/xxx

16.00

Refer to attached page.

16.00

Cable out-diameter : 12.7 mm

K-Gauge GL-300, EQUIPMENT ON DECK(Cargo Manifold Line Pressure Measuring) PRESS.TRANSM. 1-41B ABS. 0,9% PG16 ***ATEX Product***

Ref. GT-2040

GT404D4H40T

Adapter flange

GT-325/03

14.00

Cargo manifold pressure line

Adapter flange

GT-325/04

2.00

Slop manifold pressure line

Protection Cover

GT-740

16.00

Screw M6x35

UTN014/6M

96.00

Lock washer

UTN025/6

96.00

K-Gauge GL-300, EQUIPMENT ON DECK(N2 Gas Main line Pressure) PRESS.TRANSM.0,8-1,4B ABS.0,25% PG16 Ref. GT-2045 ***ATEX Product***

GT402A4C0,6K

Cable out-diameter : 12.7 mm 1.00

Adapter flange

GT-769

1.00

Protection Cover

GT-740

1.00

Screw Hex. M6x20 AISI316

UTN014/6H

4.00

Counter Nut 1/2" BSP AISI316

6531-007.1002

1.00

K-Gauge GL-300, EQUIPMENT ON DECK(N2 Gas line Pressure for Residual Tank)

Pre-Installation

Cable out-diameter : 12.7 mm

PRESS.TRANSM.0,8-1,4B ABS.0,25% PG16 Ref. BL071 ***ATEX Product***

GT402A4C0,6K

1.00

TEFLON THRED TAPE, GOLDEND 1/2” CHE

6340-008.0012

1.00

ADAPTER UNIT TYPE UP-448

UP-448

1.00

2 of 4

Item name

Item number

Quantity

K-Gauge GL-300, EQUIPMENT ON DECK(Ballast Pump Disch.) PRESS.TRANSM.0-10B ABS.0,25% PG16 ***ATEX Product***

Ref. GT-2047

Remark Cable out-diameter : 12.7 mm

GT403A0A10D

2.00

Shock absorber AISI 316

GT-1244/3

2.00

Connection box

UG-917

2,00

Flange with PUR cable

GT-1504/250

2.00

Protection hose adapter

GL-2519

2.00

Flexible Cable Protection Tube with flange 3/4” JIS 5K-40A

GL-1387/350

2.00

Length is 350 mm.

16.00

Middle Bottom

K-Gauge GL-300, EQUIPMENT ON FRAMO TOP-MOUNTING(Tank temp. Measuring) TEMP.SENSOR 2WIRE PT1000 L=8000 mm

MN-1535SM

Length is 25000 mm.

Cable out-diameter : 12.1 mm

TEMP.SENSOR 2WIRE PT1000 L=14500 mm

MN-1535SM

16.00

Cargo Temperature Unit

GC-300-KM1

16.00

GASKET FOR GC-300, Novaflon

UY-148-3

16.00

Installation kit for GC-300

INS-GC-300

3.00

Flexible Cable Protection Tube with flange 3/4”

GL-1387/xxx

16.00

Refer to attached page.

Bottom

K-Gauge GL-300, EQUIPMENT ON DECK(Tank temp. Measuring for Residual Tank)

Cable out-diameter : 12.1 mm

TEMP.SENSOR 2WIRE PT1000 L=2400 mm

MN-1535SM

1.00

Cargo Temperature Unit

GC-300-KM1

1.00

GASKET FOR GC-300, Novaflon

UY-148-3

1.00

Adapter for GC-300 JIS25A pipe

Ref. 353163

353167

1.00

Installation kit for GC-300

INS-GC-300

1.00

Flexible Cable Protection Tube with flange 3/4”

GL-1387/xxx

1.00

RES-GL-300

1.00

Pre-Installation Refer to attached page.

K-Gauge GL-300, Spare parts Spareparts for GL-300

3 of 4

Item name

Item number

Quantity

Remark

4 of 4

K-Gauge GL-300 Cargo Level System Sensor connection list and tankname overview System information:

Revision history:

Yard/hull: HMD H2547

A

2013.12.24 GSS

KM ref. No: i034739

B

2015.01.05 GSS

Tank

Measuring point

Sensor/transmitter

GL-300 cabinet conn.

Connection dwg.

NO.1(P) C.O. TK.

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 1 X2

GL-2641

NO.1(S) C.O. TK.

NO.2(P) C.O. TK.

NO.2(S) C.O. TK.

NO.3(P) C.O. TK.

NO.3(S) C.O. TK.

NO.4(P) C.O. TK.

NO.4(S) C.O. TK.

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 1 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 1 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 1 X1

GL-2641

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 2 X2

GL-2641

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 2 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 2 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 2 X1

GL-2641

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 3 X2

GL-2641

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 3 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 3 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 3 X1

GL-2641

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 4 X2

GL-2641

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 4 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 4 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 4 X1

GL-2641

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 5 X2

GL-2641

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 5 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 5 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 5 X1

GL-2641

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 6 X2

GL-2641

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 6 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 6 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 6 X1

GL-2641

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 7 X2

GL-2641

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 7 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 7 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 7 X1

GL-2641

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 8 X2

GL-2641

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 8 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 8 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 8 X1

GL-2641

NO.5(P) C.O. TK.

NO.5(S) C.O. TK.

NO.6(P) C.O. TK.

NO.6(S) C.O. TK.

NO.7(P) C.O. TK.

NO.7(S) C.O. TK.

SLOP(P) TK.

SLOP(S) TK.

Residual

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 9 X2

GL-2641

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 9 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 9 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 9 X1

GL-2641

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 10 X2

GL-2641

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 10 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 10 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 10 X1

GL-2641 GL-2641

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 11 X2

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 11 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 11 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 11 X1

GL-2641

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 12 X2

GL-2641

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 12 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 12 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 12 X1

GL-2641

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 13 X2

GL-2641

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 13 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 13 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 13 X1

GL-2641

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 14 X2

GL-2641

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 14 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 14 X1

GL-2641 GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 14 X1

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 15 X2

GL-2641

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 15 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 15 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 15 X1

GL-2641

Ullage

GLA-300

SPU no. 16 X2

GL-2641

Inert gas pressure

GT-450

SPU no. 16 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Middle

GC-300

SPU no. 16 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 16 X1

GL-2641

Tank temperature Bottom

GC-300

SPU no. 17 X1

GL-2641

Sensor connection list

A:2013-12-24 B:2014-05-03 C:2014-05-21 D:2014-12-30

K-GAUGE GL-300 Cargo Level System

Yard / Hull: HMD H2547 KM ref no: i034739

E:2014-12-31 F:2015-02-12 G: H:

Project mgr: Hyeon-Chul, Ku Project eng: Gyeong Su Seo

Term (int)

Term (ext)

Ext. Conn. Dwg Sensor dwg.

Measurement

Vessel

DPU 0520

RAi-16xe-(011/012)

341707

4-20mA

Draft(AFT)

Signal comes from HANLA

A

RAi-16xe-(021/022)

341707

4-20mA

Draft(FWD)

Signal comes from HANLA

A

RAi-16xe-(031/032)

341707

4-20mA

Draft(MID P)

Signal comes from HANLA

A

RAi-16xe-(041/042)

341707

4-20mA

Draft(MID S)

Signal comes from HANLA

A

RAi-16xe-(051/052)

341707

GT-1097

4-20mA

Atmospheric Pressure

RAi-16xe-(062)

341707

GT-2045

4-20mA

N2 Gas Main Line pressure

RAi-16xe-(072)

341707

GT-2047

4-20mA

Ballast Pump Disch. Line pressure(S)

RAi-16xe-(082)

341707

GT-2047

4-20mA

Ballast Pump Disch. Line pressure(P)

RAi-16xe-(092)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

No.1 Cargo Manifold Line Pressure(S)

RAi-16xe-(102)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

No.2 Cargo Manifold Line Pressure(S)

RAi-16xe-(112)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

No.3 Cargo Manifold Line Pressure(S)

RAi-16xe-(122)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

No.4 Cargo Manifold Line Pressure(S)

RAi-16xe-(132)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

No.5 Cargo Manifold Line Pressure(S)

RAi-16xe-(142)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

No.6 Cargo Manifold Line Pressure(S)

RAi-16xe-(152)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

No.7 Cargo Manifold Line Pressure(S)

RAi-16xe-(162)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

Slop Manifold Line Pressure(S)

RAi-16xe-(012)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

No.1 Cargo Manifold Line Pressure(P)

RAi-16xe-(022)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

No.2 Cargo Manifold Line Pressure(P)

RAi-16xe-(032)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

No.3 Cargo Manifold Line Pressure(P)

RAi-16xe-(042)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

No.4 Cargo Manifold Line Pressure(P)

RAi-16xe-(052)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

No.5 Cargo Manifold Line Pressure(P)

RAi-16xe-(062)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

No.6 Cargo Manifold Line Pressure(P)

RAi-16xe-(072)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

No.7 Cargo Manifold Line Pressure(P)

RAi-16xe-(082)

341707

GT-2040

4-20mA

Slop Manifold Line Pressure(P)

RAi-16xe-(092)

341707

4-20mA

N2 Gas line pressure for Residual

RAi-16xe-(101/102)

Spare

RAi-16xe-(111/112)

Spare

RAi-16xe-(121/122)

Spare

RAi-16xe-(131/132)

Spare

RAi-16xe-(141/142)

Spare

RAi-16xe-(152/154)

341707

DI

Quint power fail

RAi-16xe-(162/164)

Spare

DPU 0521

Int.Conn. dwg

Tag

Sensor/transmitter

Layout

Rev

A GT-402(DZ-110_01) GT-403(DZ-110_02) GT-403(DZ-110_03)

GT-404(DZ-110_04) GT-404(DZ-110_05) GT-404(DZ-110_06) GT-404(DZ-110_07) GT-404(DZ-110_08) GT-404(DZ-110_09) GT-404(DZ-110_10) GT-404(DZ-110_11)

GT-404(DZ-110_12) GT-404(DZ-110_13) GT-404(DZ-110_14) GT-404(DZ-110_15) GT-404(DZ-110_16) GT-404(DZ-110_17) GT-404(DZ-110_18) GT-404(DZ-110_19)

GT-402(DZ-110_20)

F F F

F F F F F F F F

F F F F F F F F

F

C E

K-Gauge GL-300 Cargo Level System

MAIN CABINET 1 FUSE OVERVIEW

F7

F6

F5

F4

F3

F2

F1

F40

F30

6A

6A

6A

6A

6A

6A

2A

2A

2A

2x10A

2x10A

Fuse Size

IPC/AIPC

RAIx,

DOOR FAN

X3

X2

X1

SW A1-3

FAN1-6

U02

U01

Unit

1/4

1/4

1/4

V1/V2

+/-

N,L,GND

N,L,GND

24V POWER FOR GLK-300 17

24V POWER FOR GLK-300 9-16

24V POWER FOR GLK-300 1-8

230VAC FROM YARD SUPPLY

230VAC FROM UPS

Term. Description

Zener Barrier 1-20

SPARE

13.3" TOUCH SCREEN COMPUTER

DPU's

FAN FOR VENTILATION OF CABINET

SPARE

ETHERNET SWITCH A

FAN FOR GLK-300 RADAR PROCESSING UNITS

F8

X10 1/3

F9 6A

2A DZ110

F11

F10

HMD H2547

Power X010 (24VDC)

1299169B

Tank Monitoring

Requested Information Sheet

Request information sheet for K-Gauge GL-300 CLS

1

1299169B

Tank Monitoring

Requested Information Sheet

Requested information for K-Gauge GL-300 Cargo Level System Yard and hull number: Ship owner: Name of ship: Purchasing responsible: Project responsible: Telephone no.: E-mail: Commissioning Date: Type of vessel: Date: Signature by yard:

HMD H2547 NAVIG8 TRF MANDAL Mr. J.H.Woo +82-52-250-6735 [email protected] 37K Product Tanker

(confirming that information given in this document is correct. This information will be used by Kongsberg Maritime to start engineering and manufacture the specified parts)

Revisions A. 2013.12.24 GSS : First issue B. 2014.05.03 GSS : Updated with information from shipyard. NOTE; The information contained in this document is subject to change without prior notice. Kongsberg Maritime AS shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this document. © 2010 Kongsberg Maritime AS. All rights reserved. No part of this work covered by the copyright hereon may be reproduced or otherwise copied without prior permission from Kongsberg Maritime AS.

2

1299169B

1. GENERAL INFORMATION

Tank Monitoring

Cargo Cabinet (Fig.364414 and 364417)

Requested Information Sheet

System Config (Choose one in each box)

check

Volume presentation in Operator Station No Volume presentation in Operator Station

Ref.point for cargo ullage at Manual Sounding (Standard) Ref.point for cargo ullage at Radar pos Ref.point for cargo ullage at Centre of Gravity Monitors will be console(flush)mounted Monitors will be desk mounted

Std Cabinet color (RAL 7035): Std right hinged door: Std 230Vac Power: Note: Any choice of Non-Std may lead to

Non Std Color:____________ Non Std left hinged door: NonStd 110Vac Power:

Other Comments: __________________________________ __________________________________ __________________________________

price add if not agreed during sales

3

1299169B

Tank Monitoring

2. The GL-300 Radar Tank Gauge - information tank data

Requested Information Sheet

Definition Hr:

Definition Hb:

The vertical distance from GL0 to MP (manual sounding, UTI).

The distance from GL0 to tank bottom, measured vertically below RTG. Hr + Hb = MPB

4

1299169B

Tank Monitoring

Requested Information Sheet

3. Definitions of GL0, Gauge Socket, Hr, MP and Quadrants Location of GL0

Sign of the Hr

Manual Ullage point, (MP) GL0 GL0

Sign of the Hr

Manual Ullage point, (MP) GL0 GL0

Manual Ullage point, (MP) GL0 GL0

+HR HR

CG: MP:

Centre of gravity Manual point

La:

Longitudinal distance from sensor to CG Longitudinal distance from sensor to MP Transversal distance from sensor to CG Transversal distance from sensor to MP

Lb: Ta: Tb:

Longitudinal distance from AP to sensor Trans: Transversal distance from CL to sensor

-HR

> Qadrant 2

Qadrant 1

MP

Tb

La: + Ta: + Lb: + Tb: +

Lb CG

Ta RADAR

La

Ta, Tb

Long:

La: Ta: Lb: Tb: -

Qadrant 3

Qadrant 4

M42-00000.109

La: Ta: + Lb: Tb: +

AFT

5

1299169B

Tank Monitoring

4. Radar Tank Gauge - Parabolic type Code

Requested Information Sheet

Fig GL-2661

6

1299169B

5. Radar Tank Gauge – Horn type code

Tank Monitoring

Requested Information Sheet

Fig GL-2662 7

1299169B

Tank Monitoring

Requested Information Sheet

6. TANKS - Radar type, position and outer cable dim

Hb mm

Hr mm

Exact values for commissioning Long. Trans. Tb Lb Ta La AP CL Mm mm mm mm mm Mm

No.1 COT(P)

16443

110

-560

2

No.1 COT(S)

16443

110

560

3

No.2 COT(P)

16443

110

4

No.2 COT(S)

16443

5

No.3 COT(P)

6

Tank no.

Tank Name

1

Quadrant no.

Radar type

Protection Flex tube type GLA-300/xABCDE GL13XX/XXX code mm

15200

-4465

GLA-300/P113PJ

0

15200

4465

GLA-300/P131PJ

-560

0

136305

-4465

GLA-300/P113PJ

110

560

0

136305

4465

GLA-300/P131PJ

16443

110

-560

0

120140

-4465

GLA-300/P113PJ

No.3 COT(S)

16443

110

560

0

120140

4465

GLA-300/P131PJ

7

No.4 COT(P)

16443

110

-560

0

102200

-4465

GLA-300/P113PJ

8

No.4 COT(S)

16443

110

560

0

102200

4465

GLA-300/P131PJ

9

No.5 COT(P)

16443

110

-560

0

81115

-4465

GLA-300/P113PJ

10

No.5 COT(S)

16443

110

560

0

81115

4465

GLA-300/P131PJ

11

No.6 COT(P)

16443

110

-560

0

68100

-4465

GLA-300/P113PJ

12

No.6 COT(S)

16443

110

560

0

68100

4465

GLA-300/P131PJ

GL-1389/ GL-1387/ GL-1389/ GL-1387/ GL-1389/ GL-1387/ GL-1389/ GL-1387/ GL-1389/ GL-1387/ GL-1389/ GL-1387/ GL-1389/ GL-1387/ GL-1389/ GL-1387/ GL-1389/ GL-1387/ GL-1389/ GL-1387/ GL-1389/ GL-1387/ GL-1389/ GL-1387/

Cable dim. Mm

Main : 21.1 Temp : 12.1 Main : 21.1 Temp : 12.1 Main : 21.1 Temp : 12.1 Main : 21.1 Temp : 12.1 Main : 21.1 Temp : 12.1 Main : 21.1 Temp : 12.1 Main : 21.1 Temp : 12.1 Main : 21.1 Temp : 12.1 Main : 21.1 Temp : 12.1 Main : 21.1 Temp : 12.1 Main : 21.1 Temp : 12.1 Main : 21.1 Temp : 12.1

8

1299169B

Tank Monitoring

Requested Information Sheet

13

No.7 COT(P)

16443

110

-560

0

53350

-4465

GLA-300/P113PJ

14

No.7 COT(S)

16443

110

560

0

53350

4465

GLA-300/P131PJ

15

Slop T(P)

16443

164

635

300

39800

-3270

GLA-300/P131PJ

16

Slop T(S)

16443

164

-635

300

39800

3270

GLA-300/P113PJ

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

GL-1389/ GL-1387/ GL-1389/ GL-1387/ GL-1389/ GL-1387/ GL-1389/ GL-1387/

Main : 21.1 Temp : 12.1 Main : 21.1 Temp : 12.1 Main : 21.1 Temp : 12.1 Main : 21.1 Temp : 12.1

9

1299169B

Tank Monitoring

7. CARGO TANKS – Temperature box for FRAMO pump installation:

Requested Information Sheet

Temperature box for deck installation:

10

1299169B

Tank Monitoring

Requested Information Sheet

8. CARGO TANKS temperature Sensors

Length of sensor Tank no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Tank Name

No.1 COT(P) No.1 COT(S) No.2 COT(P) No.2 COT(S) No.3 COT(P) No.3 COT(S) No.4 COT(P) No.4 COT(S) No.5 COT(P) No.5 COT(S) No.6 COT(P) No.6 COT(S) No.7 COT(P) No.7 COT(S) Slop T(P) Slop T(S) Residual Tank

Low mm

14500 14500 14500 14500 14500 14500 14500 14500 14500 14500 14500 14500 14500 14500 14500 14500 2400

Middle mm

8000 8000 8000 8000 8000 8000 8000 8000 8000 8000 8000 8000 8000 8000 8000 8000

Top mm

Protection Flex tube type GL13XX/XXX mm

GL-1387 GL-1387 GL-1387 GL-1387 GL-1387 GL-1387 GL-1387 GL-1387 GL-1387 GL-1387 GL-1387 GL-1387 GL-1387 GL-1387 GL-1387 GL-1387 GL-1387

Conn.box Type GC-300-XXX Code

GC-300-KM1 GC-300-KM1 GC-300-KM1 GC-300-KM1 GC-300-KM1 GC-300-KM1 GC-300-KM1 GC-300-KM1 GC-300-KM1 GC-300-KM1 GC-300-KM1 GC-300-KM1 GC-300-KM1 GC-300-KM1 GC-300-KM1 GC-300-KM1 GC-300-KM1

Cable dim. mm

12.1 12.1 12.1 12.1 12.1 12.1 12.1 12.1 12.1 12.1 12.1 12.1 12.1 12.1 12.1 12.1 12.1

NOTE; Sensor manufacturing length tolerance is ± 10 mm. Note also that this sensor cannot be shortened or lengthened after production, so it is important that possible adapter height above deck or pump connection box offset are included in the given sensor lengths

11

1299169B

Tank Monitoring

Requested Information Sheet

9. Data for draft, Trim and List calculations +

+

CL

FP

DMF DF TF

D

DWL

DA

LS TA

DMA LMA

+ B/2 B

ZF

Draft mark Draft sensor Forward perpendicular Aft perpendicular Midships Baseline, bottom reference Centerline Design water line Longitudinal distance AP to FP Moulded beam/breadth (amidships) Depth, distance BL to deck Draft, distance BL to DWL

LMA, LMM, LMF TF, TA, TP, TS LF, LA, LP, LS ZF, ZA, ZP, ZS

LA

AP

FP AP BL CL DWL LPP B D T

LMM

LP

DA

BL

DS

LF

TS

DS

ZA

ZP

DMS

LPP LPP/2

DF

T

TP

LMF

DP DMP

DP

ZS

CL

Longitudinal distance AP to draft mark Transversal distance CL to sensor Longitudinal distance AP to sensor Vertical distance BL to sensor

- Longitudinal distance is positive forward of AP - Transversal distance from CL is positive to starboard - Trim is positive by the stern and negative by the head - List is positive to port and negative to starboard

12

1299169B

Main dimensions Length P/P Mld. Breadth Depth Draft Draft sensor data Fwd draft sensor Aft draft sensor Port draft sensor Stbd draft sensor Fwd draft marks Aft draft marks Mid draft marks

Tank Monitoring

LPP B D T

Requested Information Sheet

Dist (mm) Trim measured by inclinometer 167600 27400 List measured by inclinometer

Long dist - L (mm) LF 167620 LA 25200 LP 88550 LS 88550 LMF 167600 LMA 9300 LMM 82900

Trans dist - T (mm) TF 987 TA 5985 TP 11500 TS 11500

ZF ZA ZP ZS

Height - Z (mm)

105 3355 0 0

PURcable length (mm)

Sensor maker HANLA HANLA HANLA HANLA

EX-area (yes/no)

Valve UP-332/ UP-288

Note: In order to achieve the best accuracy, draft sensors should be mounted on centre line. If this is not possible, the sensors should be mounted in the same distance at the same side of the centre line. List measurement sensors should be mounted symmetrically related to the centre line.

13

1299169B

10.

GT-2000

Tank Monitoring

Pressure Sensor Installation types for level monitoring GT-2010

GT-2020

GT-2050

GT-2060

Submerged Installation

Humid area Installation

Humid area Installation

Dry Installation

Dry Installation

GT403

GT403

GT403

GT402

GT402

Typical Inst; Water Ballast

Typical Inst; Void Space

Typical Inst; Void Space

Typical Inst; HFO/DO

Typical Inst; FW

Requested Information Sheet

Sensor offset for level measurements:

14

1299169B

11.

Tank Monitoring

Pressure sensor installation types for pipe pressure GT-2040

GT-2045

GT-1230

Requested Information Sheet

GT-2047

Deck Installation

Deck Installation

Deck Installation

Submerged installation

Typical Inst; Cargo Line

Typical Inst; Vapour Line

Typical Inst; Cargo Line Asphalt/Bitumen

Typical Inst; Ballast line

15

1299169B

12.

Tank Monitoring

Requested Information Sheet

Data for pipe pressure measurement

Line no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Name

Cargo Manifold Line Cargo Manifold Line Cargo Manifold Line Cargo Manifold Line Cargo Manifold Line Cargo Manifold Line Cargo Manifold Line Cargo Manifold Line Cargo Manifold Line Cargo Manifold Line Cargo Manifold Line Cargo Manifold Line Cargo Manifold Line Cargo Manifold Line Cargo Manifold Line Cargo Manifold Line N2 Gas Main Line Ballast Pump Disch. Ballast Pump Disch. N2 Gas Line for Residual Tank

PUR cable length (if GT403) mm

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 25000 25000 N/A

Cable dim.

MIN bar pressure mbar

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -0.07 -1 -1 -0.07

MAX bar pressure mbar

25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 0.25 5 5 0.25

Ex-Area Yes/No

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Installation Ref. previous page GT-XXXX

GT-2040 GT-2040 GT-2040 GT-2040 GT-2040 GT-2040 GT-2040 GT-2040 GT-2040 GT-2040 GT-2040 GT-2040 GT-2040 GT-2040 GT-2040 GT-2040 GT-2045 GT-2047 GT-2047 GT-2045

mm

12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7

16

Type of file Type of system Yard and Hull. Ship name KM ref.

Spare part & tools list K-Gauge GL-300 / Tank Gauging System HMD H2547 NAVIG8 ALABASTER I034739 Sign: 2013.12.24 GSS

Pos

Spare part description

Spare

Weight a piece

Material

1

Fuses 2A 5X20mm SLOW

10

1g

Glass

2

Fuses 6.3A 5X20mm SLOW

10

1g

Glass

3

Fan Axial 40X40X20 mm

2

10g

Plastic

1

Outline

Tank Tables and Data

K-Chief 500 Tank Tables and Data from costumer In order to perform best possible trim-/list correction etc. for measured levels, Kongsberg Maritime need information from yard/customer on a certain format.

313545/A

1

K-Chief 500

Revisions Rev. A B C D

Written by Date 11.06.07

Sign. US

Checked by Date

Sign.

Approved by Date Sign. 11.6.07 AS

Document history

Rev. A

First issue

The information contained in this document is subject to change without prior notice. Kongsberg Maritime AS shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this document. © 2007 Kongsberg Maritime AS. All rights reserved. No part of this work covered by the copyright hereon may be reproduced or otherwise copied without prior permission from Kongsberg Maritime AS.

Kongsberg Maritime AS Bekkajordet P.O.Box 1009 N-3194 Horten, Norway

2

Telephone: +47 33 03 20 00 Telefax: +47 85 02 80 28 www.kongsberg.com

313545/A

Tank Tables and Data

Table of contents 1

GENERAL ................................................................................................................4

2

CAPACITY TABLES ..............................................................................................6

3

TRIM TABLES ........................................................................................................9

313545/A

3

K-Chief 500

1 GENERAL Some abbreviations: • AP - Aft Perpendicular. Longitudinal position. Normally centre of rudderstock (if any). • FP - Fore Perpendicular. Longitudinal position. Normally the intersection between bow contour and construction waterline. • Lpp - Length between perpendiculars. Longitudinal distance AP-FP. • Lpp/2 - “Midships”. Midways between AP and FP. • LCG - Longitudinal Center of Gravity. • TCG - Transverse Centre of Gravity. • LCF - Longitudinal Centre of Flotation. Longitudinal coordinate. (See below: Center of Flotation). • TCF - Transverse Centre of Flotation. Transverse coordinate (see below: Center of Flotation). • Centre of Flotation - Given by the coordinates LCF and TCF. Centre of Gravitation for liquid surface. In Centre of Flotation, liquid level is not changing when ship trimming and listing. Liquid level in Centre of Flotation is equal to the level all over the tank if there had been no trim an list (trim = list = 0.0). Note that Centre of Flotation, for a certain filling, may differ considerable from Centre of Gravity for the volume if tank has great shape.

In order to perform best possible trim-/list correction etc. for measured levels, we need infomation from yard/customer on certain format. The quality (accuracy) of level correction and volume calculation are highly influenced by the supplied data. There are basically two different types of tank tables that may be supplied: capacity tables and trims tables. This also applies when there is ullage measuring of tanks. Trim tables normally give the best result, but regular capacity tables with surface data (LCF and TCF) may give a good result.

4

313545/A

Tank Tables and Data

Note

All tables supplied must be of the same type. Either capacity tables (only 1 volume column) or trim tables with same number of volume columns, and for the same trim values.

For basis SW 60052.07.004 and later, both trim tables and capacity tables may be used. The trim tables must then be of the same format (same trim values). Data to be supplied: − Trim tables/Capacity tables on file (most formats are accepted). − Ships length between perpendiculars (Lpp). − Ships breadth (moulded). − Draft mark positions (see below). − Sensor coordinates. − Ullage reference height (for ullage measuring tanks). Drafts are normally corrected to: − Forward sensor, to FP at centreline. − Aft sensor, to AP at centreline. − Port sensor, to Lpp/2 at ship side port. − Starboard sensor, to Lpp/2 at ship side starboard.

Note

Draft may alternatively be corrected to draft marks fore, aft, port and starboard. In this case draft mark positions measured forward AP must be supplied.

A more detailed description on handling the different table types and data is given in the document AO-11642. This document describes tank52.dat and tankcalc.ini files. It also describes different calculation procedures depending on the supplied data.

313545/A

5

K-Chief 500

2 CAPACITY TABLES Capacity tables are tables with LCF and TCF (surface data) given in tables. LCF and TCF are longitudinal and transverse coordinates for Centre of Flotation. For a certain filling level, level in Centre of Flotation, does not change when the ship is trimming/heeling. The tables should be valid for list = 0.0 deg. Tables should start at the lowest point of the tank (volume = 0.0 m3), and the last level should be at 100% filling. In case of ullage measuring, the last level must correspond to ullage reference height. This level is added when data for ullage reference point is received. The levels may be levels from the lowest point of the tank, or levels from the baseline. In case of ullage measuring, as mentioned above, the last level in the table must be the ullage reference height level. If ullage reference height is adjusted, only the level in the last line in the tank table may be corrected. New ullage tables are not required.

6

313545/A

Tank Tables and Data

A capacity table used in Tank52.dat file may look like: NO.1 C.O.TK(S) LEVEL

VOLUME

LCF

TCF

##CAPACITY TABLES ## 1 #

1

0.000

0.0 62.080

4.490

#

2

0.500

47.7 62.080

4.490

#

3

1.000

102.9 62.300

4.520

#

4

1.500

163.1 62.490

4.570

#

5

2.000

228.5 62.650

4.620

# 29 14.000 2410.7 63.140

4.670

# 30 14.500 2485.4 63.060

4.530

# 31 15.000 2556.5 63.010

4.490

# 32 15.500 2626.2 63.650

3.960

# 33 15.701 2643.6 63.650

3.960

# 34 16.500 2643.6 63.650

3.960 //Ullage ref. height

In case of ullage measuring of a tank, it is important that ullage reference height above the lowest point of the tank or above the baseline is supplied. For this table type, sensor coordinates (longitudinal and transverse) must be supplied in order to calculate long-distance from sensor to LCF, and transverse distance from sensor to TCF. LCF should be given forward/aft of AP or Lpp/2 and TCF from centreline (negative to port and positive to starboard).

313545/A

7

K-Chief 500

The table are only valid for trim = 0.00 m and list = 0.00 deg. The level must therefore be corrected for trim and list in order to find the level at “even keel” (level in Centre of Flotation). Then with the “even keel level”, the capacity table may be entered in order to calculate actual volume. If no LCF/TCF data is given, we may use LCG/TCG (Centre of Gravity) data. Thus level will be corrected to level at Centre of Gravity for actual volume. If the shape of the tank makes the level at Centre of Gravity differ considerably from the level at Centre of Floatation, the volume calculation from the tables may be wrong. This calculation method is therefore not recommended.

8

313545/A

Tank Tables and Data

3 TRIM TABLES In order to calculate a trim table, a sounding pipe must be defined. Different sounding pipe gives different trim tables. The trim tables give volumes for a number of trim values for a certain sounding. Sounding is the length measured along the sounding pipe from bottom of sounding pipe to liquid surface. The sounding pipe defined for a supplied trim table must be a vertical pipe without knuckles as the sensor is measuring a vertical level (pressure). The pipe must be defined at sensor longitudinal (and transverse) position. The start of the sounding pipe should preferably be lowest point of tank (not sensor vertical position), and extended well above tank top. The sensor fitting height above lowest point of tank (offset) is added in software. Trim table to be valid for list = 0.00 deg. Note

Trim tables for any other sounding pipes than mention above may not be used (as for instance tables for sounding pipe actually fitted).

If possible TCF should be given in the table. In this case transverse position of sensor is required. If TCF is not given, transverse distance from sensor to TCF should be given at 2 different levels. Else list correction is not performed.

313545/A

9

K-Chief 500

A trim table used in Tank52.dat file may look like: Water ballast

Fore peak lower

Frames: 216 - 244 TRIM : LEVEL

-1.0

0.0

1.0

2.0

4.0

********** VOLUMES [m3] ******

LCF

TCF

[m]

[m]

##CAPACITY TABLES ## 1 #

1

0.000

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0 0.000 0.000

#

2

1.430

14.0

13.7

13.4

13.1

12.6 0.000 0.000

#

3

1.530

16.3

16.0

15.7

15.3

14.8 0.000 0.000

#

4

1.630

18.8

18.5

18.1

17.8

17.1 0.000 0.000

#

5

1.730

21.6

21.1

20.7

20.3

19.6 0.000 0.000

#

6

1.830

24.4

24.0

23.5

23.1

22.3 0.000 0.000

#

7

1.930

27.5

27.0

26.5

26.1

25.2 0.000 0.000

#

8

2.030

30.7

30.2

29.7

29.2

28.2 0.000 0.000

#

9

2.130

34.1

33.5

33.0

32.5

31.4 0.000 0.000

# 123 13.530

954.1

953.3

952.5

951.8

950.4 0.000 0.000

# 124 13.630

964.6

963.7

962.9

962.2

960.8 0.000 0.000

# 125 13.730

975.3

974.4 973. 6

972.8

971.4 0.000 0.000

# 126 13.830

986.2

985.3

984.4

983.6

982.2 0.000 0.000

# 127 13.930

997.2

996.3

995.4

994.6

993.1 0.000 0.000

# 128 14.030 1008.4 1007.4 1006.6 1005.7 1004.2 0.000 0.000 # 129 14.130 1019.7 1018.8 1017.9 1017.0 1015.4 0.000 0.000 # 130 14.230 1029.2 1029.3 1028.5 1027.2 1024.7 0.000 0.000 # 131 14.330 1029.3 1029.3 1029.3 1029.3 1028.8 0.000 0.000 # 132 14.430 1029.3 1029.3 1029.3 1029.3 1029.3 0.000 0.000 # 133 14.530 1029.3 1029.3 1029.3 1029.3 1029.3 0.000 0.000 # 134 14.630 1029.3 1029.3 1029.3 1029.3 1029.3 0.000 0.000

10

313545/A

Tank Tables and Data

In the table above, volumes are given for trim = -1.0, 0.0, 1.0, 2.0 and 4.0 m. Negative values indicates trim by bow, positive trim by stern. If opposite sign convention is used in supplied tables, we will convert them. TCF is not given (should preferable be given). LCF has no relevance. Negative values indicate trim by bow; positive values indicate trim by stern. If opposite sign convention is used in supplied tables, we will convert them, The levels should extend well above tank top so that all volumes at the last line in the table are equal to maximum volume. In case of ullage measuring for a tank, it is important that ullage reference height above lowest point of tank or above baseline is supplied. This ullage reference height should be the last level in the table. See example above (capacity table).

313545/A

11

CHAPTER 2

Radar

GLA-300

UNIT PROPERTIES: Weight: 11.7kg Protection: IP68 Materials: AISI 316 and PTFE Ex class: Ex ia IIC T4

45°

Flange type, code E

124

287

272 208

E plane

320

280

F E A

Flexible protection tube

N P

Trondheim Project number

Merchant Marine Division

Designed by

Checked by

GL-2661

DIMENSIONAL SKETCH

Radar Tank Gauge GLA-300/P series types Ordering code information and main dimension. Drawing type

Title

AAS/JSR AAS AAS

KSI KSI HJH

A3

Revision

1: 4

Scale

Size

F

1 of 1

Sheet

Approved by

JIS B2220 5K A200 (standard) Kongsberg (refit) J R

STS ASD STP

Flange type E

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. © Kongsberg Maritime 2008

GL-300

DESCRIPTION

8.0 - 15.0 12.5 - 20.5 17.0 - 25.5

Protection tube adapters will be included according to choosen gland type code (B and C).

Remarks

Flexible protection tube type GL-1389/FR has to be ordered separately. For assembly see drawing 369735

No protection tube

Blind plug M20 M25 M32 0 1 2 3

Cable protection type

Gland type

C (right inlet)

D

8.0 - 15.0 12.5 - 20.5 17.0 - 25.5

Blind plug M20 M25 M32 0 1 2 3

Cable dim. Ø

Cable dim. Ø

No pressure sensor 0.8 - 1.4 bar 0.8 - 1.8 bar

Gland type

0 1 2

B (left inlet)

Kongsberg Maritime AS

DATE

Crude/Product/Chemical Chemical, spec. requirement

Apllies to

Type codes ABCDE for GLA-300/xABCDE Pressure range A

AISI316 AISI316 with Mo > 2.5 %

Material type

06.05.2013 Text update 09.12.2011 Flange type , code E, added to view. D in Doc. ID removed. 30.09.2010 First release

Project / Product name

REV.

8 x 23

22.5° 45°

Offset Parabolic antenna Offset Parabolic antenna

GLA-300/P GLA-300/PC

H plane

Sensor type

GLA-300/x

Sensor type code x for GLA-300/xABCDE:

GLA-300/P series Radar Tank Gauge type code and main dimensions.

Main dimensions ( 1 : 4 )

Gland size, code B Left inlet

Optional protection tube adapters, code D

Right inlet Gland size, code C

10

1:5

34

n316 `2 n280 `1

n25 `1

2

0.5

n204 `2

3 2 1 ITEM C B A

1 JIS B2220 200 Full Face Gasket 1 JIS B2220 200 Full Face Gasket 1 JIS B2220 200 Full Face Gasket QTY DESCRIPTION

UY-149-3 UY-149-2 UY-149-1 PART NUMBER Parts List

02.11.2010 Added Novaflon 300 option 07.12.2009 Added Goretex option 2009-10-19 First edition

REV.

DATE

Material:

DESCRIPTION

See remark

AAS Reidar STS

Reidar AAS STP

Designed by

Checked by

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

Surface treatment:

Surface: Ra 3,2

Merchant Marine Division GL-300

Approved by

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45~

JIS B2220 5K 200 Full Face Gasket for GLA-300 socket

Sheet Size

A4 Scale

Trondheim Project / Product name

KSI HJH KSI

Threads: 6g/6H

Title

Kongsberg Maritime AS

novaflon 300 Goretex Nitril MATERIAL

1:2 Project number

Drawing type

DIMENSION SKETCH

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. © Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Revision

UY-149

C

Cable support

9

5

4

9

1

1

1

7

8

2

3

1

6

Project number

GL-2630

Approved by

KM/YS YS YS YS YS YS YS YS KM SUPPLIER KSI HJH

A3

Revision

1:4

Scale

Size

B

1 of 1

Sheet

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45

Checked by

Installation of GLA-300/P on Tank Socket

Threads: 6g/6H

INSTALLATION DRAWING

Drawing type The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. Kongsberg Maritime 2008

GL-300

Project / Product name

Trondheim

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS

Title

Surface: Ra 3,2

Designed by

Surface treatment:

DESCRIPTION

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

DATE

MATERIAL BEL AAS STP AAS

novaflon300 Tank compatible

A4 A4 A4 A4

Material:

REV.

9 4 Serrated Lock Washer M20 (UTN267/G) 8 6 Spring Washer DIN 127 M20 (UTN025/F) 7 8 Hex Nut DIN 934/DIN EN 24032 M20 (UTN026/H) 6 8 Hex-Head Bolt DIN 933/ISO 4017 M20x65 (UTN014/D65 ) 5 1 Cable for Temperature Sensors 4 1 GLA-300 Main Cable 3 1 JIS B2220 200 Full Face Gasket UY-149-3 2 1 Tank Socket GL-2522 1 1 RTG unit GLA-300 GLA-300/P ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION Washers (9), gasket (3), tank socket and edited text B 2012-05-23 A 2010-06-09 Released

Serrated Lock Washers, item 9, under bolt head and under nut on the 2 bolts closest to the main cable connection.

Installations utilizing Flexible Protection Hoses: Cable supports are unnecessary and shall be omitted when making Tank Socket GL-2522. See Drawing GL-2618/19/20/21 regarding Flexible Protection Hoses bend radii and mounting dimensions. See Drawing GL-2626 regarding assembly of cable glands and Flexible Protection Hoses.

Installations not utilizing Flexible Protection Hoses: Cable supports are needed when making Tank Socket GL-2522. See Drawing GL-2581 regarding cabling details.

Connection method of Main Cable is shown in Installation Manual and in DRAWING GL-2631. Connection method of Cable for Temperature Sensors is likewise.

Socket drawing

170

418

280

320

177,5

50

23 x 8

Gasket area

45°x8

22,5° 45°

Flange: See comment 9

Min. 8.2mm see comment 4

A= 500,0min - 800max

Max. Ø220

Min. Ø199

90°

"D" Ø210 Ø220 Ø229

Free hole dia. Ø100 Ø100 4"(Ø100)

DATE

GL-2522

AAS ASD STP Checked by

STS STS STS Designed by

GL-2522

Dimensional sketch

Drawing type

Radar Tank Gauging System

Socket for GLA-300

Title

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. © Kongsberg Maritime

GL-300

Project number / Item ID

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS Project / Product name

Material:

DESCRIPTION

27.02.2013 Ttle field and comment 8 text changed. 05.03.2012 Comments 9 added 01.12.2008 First edition See comment 1 and 2 Surface treatment: See comment 2

REV.

E D A

9. Flange type (standard): JIS B2220 size 200 5k.

1:5

A3

E

Revision

Scale

Size

1 of 1

Approved by

KSI KSI HBE

Sheet

8. Cable guides is optional recommendable in installations without cable protection (flexible protection tubes).

On "Arctic-/ Ice Class" it is highly recommended.

7: Jet-Nozzle is optional and not part of the socket.

areas.

6. Socket coating/painting: According to shipyard spesifications for equipment on weather deck and cargo exposed

5: See dwg. GL-2521 for weldings/assembly.

-ANSI DN8", Schedule 40

-JIS, DN200, Schedule 40

4. Use standard pipes: -DIN, DN 200, Schedule 40

3: Weight: Appr. 30 - 40[kg]. Depending on socket height.

Storing and transportational coating for all materials except AISI 316L: HEMPELS SHOPPRIMER ZS 1589 or equal.

Beyond that: Material must always be equal to, or better than, tank/deck and/or according to spesification.

2. Material of all metallic parts with reference to: API 5LB PSL1/ASTM A53B.

1. Material bolts, nuts and washers: AISI 316

COMMENTS:

Standard option "C" A: JIS 10K 100 Ø175 B: DIN PN10 100 Ø180 C: ANSI 150LB 4" Ø191

"Inspection hatch table" with plane welding flange and standard gasket (material depending on cargo), 3 options:

Free hole dia. See inspection hatch table.

Cable guides optional dependant on installation method. See COMM.8.

Hole ISO 228-G3/8 for Jet-Nozzle(OPTIONAL) see COMM.7.

"C" see inspection hatch table "D" see inspection hatch table

For installation with flex. Prot. Tubes

B

B

A

A

1 2

M20x1.5

3

M32x1.5

5

A

1 1 1 1 1 QTY

Trondheim Project number

ASSEMBLY DRAWING

GL-2606

HJH Approved by

A3

Revision

1:2

Scale

Size

A

1 of 3

Sheet

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45~

Checked by

AAS

AISI 316L Welded AISI 316L MATERIAL

AISI 316

Installation utilizing Protection Hose on Radar Tank Gauge for cable Ø 8-15 mm (GL-2606/1) Drawing type

Title

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. © Kongsberg Maritime 2008

GL-300

Project / Product name

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS

Threads: 6g/6H

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

Designed by

Surface: Ra 3,2

DESCRIPTION

Surface treatment:

DATE Material:

REV.

Wrench size 42 mm

Protection Hose GL-1387 Adapter type GL-2604/1 GL-2604/1 329245 Gland M20x1.5 Cable ø8-15 Reduction Nipple M32x1.5 to M20x1.5 346331 GLA-300 Housing Nipple M32 PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION Parts List STP 21.04.2010 First release

5 4 3 2 1 ITEM

B-B ( 1 : 2 )

Wrench size 32 mm

G 3/4-14

Protection hose venting holes down after mounting

A-A ( 1 : 2 )

Wrench size 24 mm

4

M42x1.5

F

F

E

E

1

2

3

M42x1.5

4

F-F ( 1 : 2 )

Wrench size 42 mm

Wrench size 46 mm

G 1 1/4-11

Trondheim Project number

Threads: 6g/6H

ASSEMBLY DRAWING

GL-2606

HJH Approved by

A3

Revision

1:2

Scale

Size

A

3 of 3

Sheet

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45~

Checked by

AAS

AISI 316 A4 Welded AISI 316L MATERIAL

Installation utilizing Protection Hose on Radar Tank Gauge for cable Ø 17.0-25.5 mm (GL-2606/3) Drawing type

Title

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. © Kongsberg Maritime 2008

GL-300

Project / Product name

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS

STP Designed by Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

DESCRIPTION

Surface: Ra 3,2

First release

PART NUMBER

Surface treatment:

DATE

Parts List

GL-1389 GL-2604/3 346329

Material:

21.04.2010

Protection hose Adapter type GL-2604/3 Gland M32x1.5 Cable Ø17.0-25.5 GLA-300 Housing Nipple M32 DESCRIPTION A

1 1 1 1 QTY

REV.

4 3 2 1 ITEM

Protection hose venting holes down after mounting

E-E ( 1 : 2 )

Wrench size 36 mm

M32x1.5

M42x1.5

R240

R130

R240

500

R130 25

226

345

440

141

25

260

468

384

~50

340

GL-1389

GLA-300

UP-663

Note 1

Note 2

GL-1389 (KMK Supply)

GL-1387 (KMK Supply)

Protection hose for main cable connection Illustration is done with GL-1389 having a minimum bending radius for hose centerline equal to R=240 mm. Smaller radii is not recommended. 45 degree bends are used in this illustration. Hose insert in couplings is 25 mm. Shortest possible hose length (hose) is: Lh = 25+R* /4+R* /4+25= 426 mm Shortest possible GL-1389 total length (incl. couplings): Lt = Lh+2*39.5 = 505 mm

Protection hose for temperature cable connection Illustration is done with GL-1387 having a minimum bending radius for hose centerline equal to R=130 mm. Smaller radii is not recommended. 90 degree bends are used in this illustration. Hose insert in couplings is 25 mm. Shortest possible hose length (hose) is: Lh = 25+R* /2+R* /2+25= 458 mm Shortest possible GL-1387 total length (incl. couplings): Lt = Lh+2*37 = 532 mm

Distance to deck in illustration is 345 mm (with tank socket mounted as shown). If a shorter distance to deck is used, increase the hose length relative to 345 mm.

Distance to deck in illustration is 226 mm (with tank socket mounted as shown). If a shorter distance to deck is used, increase the hose length relative to 226 mm.

Illustration shows shortest possible distances in X, Y and 45 degrees to X direction of the protection hoses and deck pipe flanges. Cable bends are consequently 90 degrees. If a longer distance from the sensor vertical centerline to the pipe flange is required, increase the hose length relative to the distances given in the drawing for x, y, and 45 degrees from x direction of the hose. If distance between cable pipe centerlines deviates from the dimensions given for the shortest possible hoses in the illustration, additional hose bending is required. The hose length must then be individually calculated in each case.

UP-661

If distances to deck pipe flanges are larger than the distances given in the drawing, bends below 90 degrees can be used. The hose length must then be individually calculated in each case.

GL-1387

Y X

Note 1 (Main cable connection): Cable Gland combination for cable 17.0-25.5 mm. See Drawing GL-2606 Sheet 3 of 3 for details.

B A

2011-10-13 Changed radius to R240 & R130 25.05.2010 First release

REV.

Cable Gland combination for cable 8.0-15.0 mm. See Drawing GL-2606 Sheet 1 of 3 for details.

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

Surface treatment:

Surface: Ra 3,2

Kongsberg Maritime AS Merchant Marine Division Trondheim Project / Product name

GL-300

Designed by

DESCRIPTION

Material:

Note 2 (Temperature cable connection):

Configuration with interchanged main and temperature cable connection shown in drawing GL-2621.

DATE

ABL STP

Project number

STS/AAS AAS Checked by

KSI HJH Approved by

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45

Threads: 6g/6H

Title

Sheet

GLA-300 Protection Hoses Dimensions 1 of 1 GLA-300 Housing with 2 M32 inlets Size A2 GL-1389 1 1/4" hose on main cable Scale GL-1387 3/4" hose on temp. cable 1:5

Drawing type

INSTALLATION DRAWING

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Revision

GL-2620

B

25

141

R240 25 R130

25

500

R130 25

226

345

440

R240

260 340 468

~50

384

GLA-300

GL-1387

GL-1389 (KMK Supply)

GL-1387 (KMK Supply)

Protection hose for main cable connection Illustration is done with GL-1389 having a minimum bending radius for hose centerline equal to R=240 mm. Smaller radii is not recommended. 45 degree bends are used in this illustration. Hose insert in couplings is 25 mm. Shortest possible hose length (hose) is: Lh = 25+R* /4+R* /4+25= 426 mm Shortest possible GL-1389 total length (incl. couplings): Lt = Lh+2*39.5 = 505 mm

Protection hose for temperature cable connection Illustration is done with GL-1387 having a minimum bending radius for hose centerline equal to R=130 mm. Smaller radii is not recommended. 90 degree bends are used in this illustration. Hose insert in couplings is 25 mm. Shortest possible hose length (hose) is: Lh = 25+R* /2+R* /2+25= 348.5 mm Shortest possible GL-1387 total length (incl. couplings): Lt = Lh+2*37 = 422.5 mm

Distance to deck in illustration is 345 mm (with tank socket mounted as shown). If a shorter distance to deck is used, increase the hose length relative to 345 mm.

Distance to deck in illustration is 295.5 mm (with tank socket mounted as shown). If a shorter distance to deck is used, increase the hose length equal to the reduction relative to 295.5 mm.

UP-661 Note 2

Note 1

Illustration shows shortest possible distances in X, Y and 45 degrees to X direction of the protection hoses and deck pipe flanges. Cable bends are consequently 90 degrees.

GL-1389

If a longer distance from the sensor vertical centerline to the pipe flange is required, increase the hose length relative to the distances given in the drawing for x, y, and 45 degrees from x direction of the hose.

UP-663

If distance between cable pipe centerlines deviates from the dimensions given for the shortest possible hoses in the illustration, additional hose bending is required. The hose length must then be individually calculated in each case. If distances to deck pipe flanges are larger than the distances given in the drawing, bends below 90 degrees can be used. The hose length must then be individually calculated in each case.

Y X

Note 1 (Main cable connection): Cable Gland combination for cable 17.0-25.5 mm. See Drawing GL-2606 Sheet 3 of 3 for details.

B A

2011-10-13 Changed Radius to R240 & R130 25.05.2010 First release

REV.

Cable Gland combination for cable 8.0-15.0 mm. See Drawing GL-2606 Sheet 1 of 3 for details.

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

Surface treatment:

Surface: Ra 3,2

Kongsberg Maritime AS Merchant Marine Division Trondheim Project / Product name

GL-300

Designed by

DESCRIPTION

Material:

Note 2 (Temperature cable connection):

Configuration with interchanged main and temperature cable connection shown in drawing GL-2620.

DATE

ABL STP

Project number

STS/AAS AAS Checked by

KSI HJH Approved by

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45

Threads: 6g/6H

Title

Sheet

GLA-300 Protection Hoses Dimensions 1 of 1 GLA-300 Housing with 2 M32 inlets Size A2 GL-1389 1 1/4" hose on main cable Scale GL-1387 3/4" hose on temp. cable 1:5

Drawing type

INSTALLATION DRAWING

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Revision

GL-2621

B

Common radar installation drawings

CHAPTER 3

Pressure

Atmospheric pressure measurement - Indoor mounting -

5

4

Outdoor area

8. Total weight KM supply: Approx. 0.85 kg.

7. Make sure that cable and gland fit together. Outer rubber shield on cable must pass the inlet of the gland. Tighten the gland with a torque of 7-10 Nm.

6. Installation kit (2): GT-2092 - Clamp (2a) (Polyamid) - Manometer coupling (2b) (Brass) - 8x1 copper tube (1.5 m) (2c) (Copper)

5. The cover (5) must be installed to stabilize, and to prevent wind and weather to influence on atmospheric pressure on pipe inlet.

4. The nameplate (3) must be placed nearby the ATM pressure transmitter where it is easily visible.

3. The ATM pressure transmitter has protection grade IP 66/67.

2. The pressure transmitter can be mounted directly on the wall in the cargo control room.

1. Pressure Transmitter must be installed vertically.

REMARKS:

Indoor area

A-A

4.2 Clamp hole

M20 7-12

M20+ 10-14

M25 13-18

A

DESCRIPTION

Project number

Designed by

Checked by

GT-2090

SYSTEM LAY-OUT

Drawing type

Atmospheric pressure measurement. Pressure transmitter mounted indoor with atmospheric pressure pipe.

Title

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Level and pressure measurem.

Trondheim

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS

DATE

A3

Revision

E

1:3

Scale

Size

1 of 1

Sheet

Approved by

YARD SUPPLY YARD SUPPLY KM Brass NiCr See Remark 6 KM KM AISI 316 MATERIAL SUPPLIER ASD RHH MGJ HJH BEL RHH HJH RHH HBE HBE STS RHH

Cable gland (Rem. 7)

1 Weather protection 1 Fastening screws 1 Nameplate E-2660 1 Inst. kit atmospheric pressure transmitter GT-2092 1 Pressure transmitter GT402A_C0,6V PART NUMBER QTY DESCRIPTION 2012-06-11 Partlist updated, matr. added. Remark 8 changed. 2011-11-03 Added nameplate and remark 2-3. 2011-06-28 Rem. pos.2. Added comm. rem. 3. 2011-03-08 Released

Project / Product name

REV.

5 4 3 2 1 ITEM E D C A

For cable

Cable gland

2c

2b

2a

1

3

A

Ballast pump discharge line pressure measurement

4

KONGSBERG MARITIME SCOPE OF SUPPLY

A

YARD SUPPLY

Tank wall

10

11

3

Tank bottom

12

A(1:2)

6

1. Ensure that the cable between pressure transmitter and connection box is not strained after installation. 2. Install cables according to drawing 359481 and installation guide E-2709. The specified torques are maximum value for compression gland nuts. 3. Material and installation of yard supplied parts must be according to ship and classification society requirements. 4. At new design use: Discharge side: GT403A0H10D (approx. 0-10 bar atm.) with a shock absorber in front. Suction side: GT403A0A10D (approx. -1-9 bar atm.) with a shock absorber in front. Shock absorber: GT-1244/3. (This combination of shock absorber and upgraded sensing element can withstand higher pressure spikes) 5. At spare or retrofit, use the same range and zero point as originally installed, but with a shock absorber in front acc. to doc. GT-1455. The D-type with front adapter in Titanium is recommended. This recommendation is valid for GT402xxxD and GT403xxxD types. 6. Total weight KM supply: Approx. 2.6 kg + PUR cable 0.04 kg/m.

REMARKS:

5

7

8

9

15

14

13

Tank deck

Clamp nut Torque 10 Nm 20 1

FULL INSTALLATION

C

B

Hex-Head Bolt DIN 931/ISO 4014

4 1 1

13 12 11

1 1 1 1

6 5 4 3

Connection box

Flange with PUR cable

UG-917

DESCRIPTION

Project number

Designed by

Checked by

GT-2047

Document ID

SYSTEM LAY-OUT

Drawing type

Ballast pump suction/discharge line Submerged UG-917 weather proof connection box, IP66/67

Title

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Part No. contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Level and pressure measurem.

Trondheim

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS

DATE

Project / Product name

REV.

KM

A3

Revision

B

1:15

Scale

Size

1 of 1

Sheet

Approved by

KM AISI 316L Titanium KM Titanium KM MATERIAL SUPPLIER ASD RHH MGJ HBE ASD RHH

AISI 316

KM

YARD SUPPLY

YARD SUPPLY

Ballast pipe Adapter ISO228-G1/2

YARD SUPPLY

Rubber protection

YARD SUPPLY

YARD SUPPLY

YARD SUPPLY

YARD SUPPLY

YARD SUPPLY

YARD SUPPLY

YARD SUPPLY

YARD SUPPLY

Protection pipe suspension

Titanium

Nitril

2

YARD SUPPLY

GT-1504/-

359218 (optional)

16

5

C(1:3)

Cable protection pipe

76.3 mm Pipe DN65

Standard flange JIS65 B 2220 K5 SOP

1

2 1 Shock absorber GT-1244/3 1b 1 Pressure transmitter (discharge) GT403A0H___D 1a 1 Pressure transmitter (suction) GT403A0A___D ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION PUR cable and partlist updated. Remark 6 added. 2012-06-22 B A 2011-08-30 First release

2

1

7

8

9

1

Spring Washer DIN 127

4

14

10

Hex Nut DIN 934/DIN EN 24032

4

15

Gasket JIS65

PTFE tape

1

7

Gland nut Torque 2 Nm

Gland nut Torque 5 Nm

16

B(1:3)

Approx. 147

Min. 114

89

130 15 155

Gland for cable:

M30x1.5

4-6

8-15

DESCRIPTION

Project number

Designed by

BEL STS

Checked by

ASD RHH

Connection box for level and pressure measurement. Top mounted installation. IP67, JIS 65 5K interface.

UG-917

DIMENSIONAL SKETCH

Drawing type

Title

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Trondheim

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS

DATE

2012-07-05 Added thread dimension and remark 1 2010-09-28 Released

Project / Product name

REV.

B A

Technical data: Material: AISI 316 Protection: IP66/67 Weight: 2 kg

A(1:2)

Remarks: 1. Flexible protection tube: Adapter GL-2519 added for use with flexible protection tube GL-1387 2. Assembly drawing: UG-918

Gland for cable:

34

10

81

A3

Revision

B

1:1

Scale

Size

1 of 1

Sheet

Approved by

MGJ HBE

GT403

GT402

3

1

2

Shock absorber installation: 1. Apply PTFE-tape on shock absorber threads [1]. 2. Install in ballast pipe adapter (70 Nm) [2]. 3. Apply PTFE-tape on transmitter front threads [3]. 4. Install transmitter in shock absorber (70 Nm). C B A REV.

04.09.2012 Flange with PUR cable updated. Text updated. 10.08.2010 Make-up torque changed. 22.01.2008 Released DATE

DESCRIPTION

ASD STS STS

RHH RHH -

Designed by

Checked by

Title

Kongsberg Maritime AS Mechant Marine Division Trondheim Project / Product name

-

Project number / Item ID

MGJ HBE KJA Approved by Sheet

Installation of shock absorber GT-1244/3

1 of 1 Size

for transm. type GT402...D and GT403...D in ballast pump suction/discharge systems

A4 Scale

1:3

Drawing type

Installation Drawing

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. Kongsberg Maritime

Revision

GT-1455

C

Black -

Red +

2x0.24mm

Conductors with colours blue and white shall not be connected. 5

REMARKS: 1. Replaces GT-1234. 2. Materials: Flange: Titanium grade 2 Cable: Polyurethane O-ring: Viton 3. Protection grade w/ pressure transmitter: IP68 - 6bar 4. Weight: 40g + 40g/m 5. Insulation resistance > 1500 M x km at 3kV DC and 20 C. 6. Service temperature: -20 to 80 C. 7. M4 unbraco screws delivered with pressure transmitter. 8. Limited use submerged in chemicals due to viton tube.

55

CL

8

4x 5

ORDERING EXAMPLE: GT-1504/350 Black Mechanical design Total length, CL[dm] Standard length: 50, 100, 150, 200 250, 300, 350, 400 450, 500, 600

24.7 40 48

B A REV.

26.02.2013 Added remark 8 and changed lenght of protection tube 12.04.2012 First release DATE

DESCRIPTION

AMG ASD

RHH RHH

Designed by

Checked by

Title

Kongsberg Maritime AS Merchant Marine Division Trondheim Project / Product name

-

Project number / Item ID

GT-1504/-

MGJ MGJ Approved by Sheet

Flange with PUR cable

1 of 1 Size

Type GT-1504/For pressure transmitter GT403

A4 Scale

1:1

Drawing type

Dimensional Sketch

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. Kongsberg Maritime

Revision

GT-1504

B

+24VDC Iout 0V

Optional: Use the KM Zener barrier DZ-110 if transmitter is installed in hazardous area.

1 2 3 Zener barrier DZ-110 4 5 6

IS-bar

Safe area Hazardous area Connection box UG-917

1 GND

+

2

-

3 Encl. /GND

Pressure Transmitters GT4XX-series

C B A REV.

2012-09-05 Conn. (sheet 1) & Flange with PURcable (sheet 2) updated. 2011-10-31 Earthing on sheet 1 (4) updated 2011-05-13 Released DATE

Designed by

DESCRIPTION

Kongsberg Maritime AS Merchant Marine Division

ASD ASD ASD

Title

Checked by

Cable and screen connection for connection box UG-917

MGJ HJH HBE Approved by Sheet

1(4) Size

A4 Scale

Trondheim Project / Product name

RHH RHH RHH

Project number

Drawing type

INSTALLATION DRAWING The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Revision

359481

C

Press down with a screw driver to open terminal

GT402 GT404 GT422

+ 1 2

Top view of pressure transmitter. Top cover removed.

Bend outer screen of cable back O-ring Screened cable

PUR cable

GT403 GT423

Plug connector "A"

"A"

+

-

SEEN FROM "A" O-ring

C B A REV.

2012-09-05 Conn. (sheet 1) & Flange with PURcable (sheet 2) updated. 2011-10-31 Earthing on sheet 1 (4) updated 2011-05-13 Released DATE

Designed by

DESCRIPTION

Kongsberg Maritime AS Merchant Marine Division

ASD ASD ASD

Title

Checked by

Cable and screen connection for connection box UG-917

MGJ HJH HBE Approved by Sheet

2(4) Size

A4 Scale

Trondheim Project / Product name

RHH RHH RHH

Project number

Drawing type

INSTALLATION DRAWING The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Revision

359481

C

1. Strip the cable

Screen

Sheat

27 mm

2. Tape the screen before inserting the cable Tape

3. If outer diameter of cable is larger than the inner ring of the gland gasket, remove the inner ring. Do not add any additional tape or sealing as the gasket will be sqeezed and sealed around the cable when the gland is tightened. Insert the cable until the sheat is aligned with the inner edge of the gland. Remove the tape. Inner ring Outer ring gland gasket

gland gasket

Align

4. Tighten the gland nut so the gasket is tight, see detail on Sheet 4 of 4. Fold the cable screen back distributed evenly over the gland inner surface, and fasten the screen clamp.

C B A REV.

2012-09-05 Conn. (sheet 1) & Flange with PURcable (sheet 2) updated. 2011-10-31 Earthing on sheet 1 (4) updated 2011-05-13 Released DATE

Designed by

DESCRIPTION

Kongsberg Maritime AS Merchant Marine Division

ASD ASD ASD

Title

Checked by

Cable and screen connection for connection box UG-917

MGJ HJH HBE Approved by Sheet

3(4) Size

A4 Scale

Trondheim Project / Product name

RHH RHH RHH

Project number

Drawing type

INSTALLATION DRAWING The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Revision

359481

C

Tighten the compression nut according to torque given in table below, or until the gland gasket protrudes slightly over the compression nut, see illustration.

CORRECT

INCORRECT

Gland sizes/torque Thread (M) M10x1.5 M20x1.5 M25x1.5 M32x1.5

C B A REV.

Range(mm) 4-6 8-15 12.5-20 17-25.5

Torque(NM) 2 5 7 6

2012-09-05 Conn. (sheet 1) & Flange with PURcable (sheet 2) updated. 2011-10-31 Earthing on sheet 1 (4) updated 2011-05-13 Released DATE

Designed by

DESCRIPTION

Kongsberg Maritime AS Merchant Marine Division

ASD ASD ASD

Title

Checked by

Cable and screen connection for connection box UG-917

MGJ HJH HBE Approved by Sheet

4(4) Size

A4 Scale

Trondheim Project / Product name

RHH RHH RHH

Project number

Drawing type

INSTALLATION DRAWING The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Revision

359481

C

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR GT402 AND GT403

KONGSBERG

IMPORTANT INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS OF GT402

Do NOT install Pressure Transmitter against housing/T-piece filled with cargo/liquid. Remove the liquid, trying to compress liquid may cause overpressure to the transmitter.

Top cover Cable gland/connection box

Close valve

Remove liquid to get air in. Housing/T-piece

1. Close the valve. 2. Dismount the old transmitter. Check that the T-piece/valve not is clogged. Put a finger or object into the hole where the old transmitter was placed, and remove some liquid in order to get air in. Use proper safety equipment if cargo is harmful. 3. Mount the new transmitter with a torque of 70-90 Nm. The transmitter must be installed within 30 degrees from vertical line. 4. Remove the top cover. Remove black protecting plug from the cable gland and install cable. Make sure that cable/gland fit together. Outer rubber shield on cable must pass the inlet of the gland. Tighten the gland with a torque of 7-10Nm to ensure a watertight connection. Connect the power lines with respective + to pos 1 and - to pos 2 + -

Be careful so you don’t get liquid or dirt into the connection box during installation. Replace the top cover immediately and tighten with a torque of 5-7 Nm. 5. Now you can open the valve.

! Warranty will not be valid if installation is done incorrectly! ATEX Related Document: All Changes must be approved by ATEX responsible person before taking effect. E-2709/A

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR GT402 AND GT403

KONGSBERG

IMPORTANT INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS OF GT403WITH PUR CABLE

1. 2. 3. 4.

Remove the red protecting cap. Put the o-ring into its groove. Connect the electrical socket to the transmitter (only fits one way). Make sure that the red and black cables are not squeezed between the transmitter and flange. 5. Tighten the 4 bolts using a 4mm hexagonal key with a torque of 4Nm. 6. The GT403 N-type with drainage hole is only for submerged installations. Mounting sequence:

Drainage hole

Beware so the cable is not squeezed between the transmitter and flange

Electrical socket connection Welding bracket

O-ring into groove 4 hexagonal bolts tighten with 4Nm

! Warranty will not be valid if installation is done incorrectly! ATEX Related Document: All Changes must be approved by ATEX responsible person before taking effect. E-2709/A

For installation with flex. Prot. Tubes

D

D

C

C

Wrench size 24 mm

1 2

M20x1.5

4

G 3/4-14

Wrench size 32 mm Wrench size 35 mm

D-D ( 1 : 2 )

Trondheim Project number

Threads: 6g/6H

ASSEMBLY DRAWING

GL-2626

HJH Approved by

A3

Revision

1:2

Scale

Size

A

2 of 2

Sheet

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45~

Checked by

AAS

Welded AISI 316L MATERIAL

AISI 316

Installation utilizing Protection Hose on Radar Tank Gauge with M20 Nipple for cable Ø 8-15 mm (GL-2626/2) Drawing type

Title

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. © Kongsberg Maritime 2008

GL-300

Project / Product name

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS

STP Designed by

Surface: Ra 3,2

DESCRIPTION

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

First release

PART NUMBER

Surface treatment:

DATE

Parts List

GL-1387 GL-2519 329245

Material:

08.06.2010

Protection Hose Protection hose adapter GL-1387 Gland M20x1.5 Cable ø8-15 GLA-300 Housing Nipple M20 DESCRIPTION A

1 1 1 1 QTY

REV.

4 3 2 1 ITEM

Protection hose venting holes downwards after mounting

C-C ( 1 : 2 )

3

M30x1.5

59

1x45

24.0 +- 0.0 0.3

A

B

B

A-A

1x45

32 +- 0.0 0.3

1x45

A

C

G 3/4-14 - A

17

28.5

22

C(5:1)

2 1x45

30

Project / Product name

GL-2519

Project number / Item ID

GL-2519

Detail Drawing

Drawing type

for Radar Tank Gauge

Inside M30 to outside G 3/4"

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. Kongsberg Maritime

GL300

Sheet

A3

1 of 1

B

Revision

1,5 : 1

Scale

Threads: 6g/6H

Mechant Marine Division Trondheim

Adapter type GL-2519

Title

Surface: Ra 3,2

Approved by

KSI HBE Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45

Checked by

Designed by Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

Size

DESCRIPTION

ASD STP

BEL STS

D(4:1)

VIEW2 ( 1 : 1 )

Kongsberg Maritime AS

AISI 316

DATE

2012-10-23 Extended length of threads, new frame and title field. 2008-11-19 Released

Surface treatment:

Material:

REV.

B A

Remarks: Remove all burrs.

D

M30x1.5

B-B

13

24

35

6

12

10 2

Cargo manifold line pressure measurement

118

2

4

SW 27

1

98

A

7

6

Cable gland For cable

A(1:1)

M20 7-12

O-ring

M20+ 10-14

Scale 1:4

60

DESCRIPTION

Project number

0

3

Designed by

Checked by

GT-2040

Document ID

SYSTEM LAY-OUT

A3

1/1

Revision

1:2

Scale

Size

Sheet

E

Approved by

YARD SUPPLY YARD SUPPLY KM AISI 316 KM AISI 316 KM AISI 316 KM AISI 316L KM AISI 316 MATERIAL SUPPLIER ASD RHH MGJ BEL ASD MGJ HJH RHH ASD HBE ASD RHH

M25 13-18

17

Pressure transmitter GT404 mounted on cargo line.

Drawing type

Title

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Part No. contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Level and pressure measurem.

Trondheim

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS

DATE

1 Cable 1 Cable protection tube 6 Lock washer UTN025/6 6 Screw M6x35 UTN014/6M 1 Protection cover GT-740 1 Adapter flange GT-325/1 Pressure transmitter GT404D_H__T PART NUMBER QTY DESCRIPTION Remark 10 added. Partlist updated. 1212-06-12 2012-04-11 Added material and weight. 2011-11-04 Note 5 corr. 2011-08-18 First release

Project / Product name

REV.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ITEM E D C A

Drain hole min. 6 (at lowest point)

Remove sharp edges.

REMARKS: 1. For detailed installation and replacement of pressure transmitter, see INSTALLATION DRAWING GT-1230. 2. DIMENSIONAL SKETCH, see drawing GT-1314. 3. Remove sharp edges. 4. Pos. 3 (Protection) to be used when installed on deck. 5. O-ring (61.6x2.62) delivered with pressure transmitter. 6. The protection grade of the transmitter is IP66/67. 7. Pos. 4 and 5 are delivered with the pressure transmitter. 8. GT-325 is available for different pipe sizes, see dimensional sketch GT-325. 9. Protection cover GT-740 can be replaced with GT-980, LxWxD=220x60x146. 10. Total weight KM supply: Approx. 3.8 kg

Approx. 90

5

33

Cover

146

I.G main line pressure measurement

118

4

1

5

98

SW 27

7

6

1

3

GT402A_C0.6K

Pressure transmitter

17

M20+ 10-14

0

DESCRIPTION

Project number

Designed by

MATERIAL ASD ASD ASD

AISI 316

AISI 316L

AISI 316

AISI 316

GT-2045

Document ID

SYSTEM LAY-OUT

A3

Revision

1:2

Scale

Size

C

1 of 1

Sheet

Approved by

SUPPLIER RHH MGJ HJH RHH HBE RHH

KM

KM

KM

KM

KM

YARD SUPPLY

YARD SUPPLY

Checked by

M25 13-18

AISI 316

3

Pressure transmitter GT402 mounted on vapour line.

Drawing type

Title

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Part No. contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Level and pressure measurem.

Trondheim

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS

DATE

PART NUMBER QTY DESCRIPTION Remark 5 and 6 added. Partlist updated. 2012-06-12 2011-10-31 Dim. 118 added. Qty. pos. 4 changed from 6 to 4. 2011-08-19 First release

GT-769

GT-740

Protection Adapter flange

UTN014/6H

6531-007.1002

M20 7-12

Screw M6x20

Counter nut ISO228-G1/2

60

Scale 1:4

Cable gland For cable

Cable protecting tube

Cable

Project / Product name

REV.

ITEM C B A

1

4

4

1

1

5

1

1

6

2

1

7

Drain hole min. 6 (at lowest point)

Remove sharp edges.

REMARK: 1. For detailed installation and replacement of pressure transmitter, see INSTALLATION DRAWING GT-1227. 2. Remove sharp edges. 3. Pos. 3 (Protection) to be used when installed on deck. 4. The protection grade of the transmitter is IP66/67. 5. Protection cover GT-740 can be replaced with GT-980, LxWxD=220x60x146. 6. Total weight KM supply: Approx. 2.8 kg.

Approx. 70

2

12

Cover 146

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR GT402 AND GT403

KONGSBERG

IMPORTANT INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS OF GT402

Do NOT install Pressure Transmitter against housing/T-piece filled with cargo/liquid. Remove the liquid, trying to compress liquid may cause overpressure to the transmitter.

Top cover Cable gland/connection box

Close valve

Remove liquid to get air in. Housing/T-piece

1. Close the valve. 2. Dismount the old transmitter. Check that the T-piece/valve not is clogged. Put a finger or object into the hole where the old transmitter was placed, and remove some liquid in order to get air in. Use proper safety equipment if cargo is harmful. 3. Mount the new transmitter with a torque of 70-90 Nm. The transmitter must be installed within 30 degrees from vertical line. 4. Remove the top cover. Remove black protecting plug from the cable gland and install cable. Make sure that cable/gland fit together. Outer rubber shield on cable must pass the inlet of the gland. Tighten the gland with a torque of 7-10Nm to ensure a watertight connection. Connect the power lines with respective + to pos 1 and - to pos 2 + -

Be careful so you don’t get liquid or dirt into the connection box during installation. Replace the top cover immediately and tighten with a torque of 5-7 Nm. 5. Now you can open the valve.

! Warranty will not be valid if installation is done incorrectly! ATEX Related Document: All Changes must be approved by ATEX responsible person before taking effect. E-2709/A

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR GT402 AND GT403

KONGSBERG

IMPORTANT INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS OF GT403WITH PUR CABLE

1. 2. 3. 4.

Remove the red protecting cap. Put the o-ring into its groove. Connect the electrical socket to the transmitter (only fits one way). Make sure that the red and black cables are not squeezed between the transmitter and flange. 5. Tighten the 4 bolts using a 4mm hexagonal key with a torque of 4Nm. 6. The GT403 N-type with drainage hole is only for submerged installations. Mounting sequence:

Drainage hole

Beware so the cable is not squeezed between the transmitter and flange

Electrical socket connection Welding bracket

O-ring into groove 4 hexagonal bolts tighten with 4Nm

! Warranty will not be valid if installation is done incorrectly! ATEX Related Document: All Changes must be approved by ATEX responsible person before taking effect. E-2709/A

N2 Gas line pressure measurement for Residual Tank

CHAPTER 4

Temperature

GC-300 tank temp. for Framo inst. For Cargo & Slop Tank

79.2

~151

32.5

11

60

90°

91

ATEX Scheduled document. No modification permitted without reference to the Notified Body

89

Project number

Threads: 6g/6H

GC-300-K__

GC-218

Document ID

DIMENSIONAL SKETCH

Drawing type

Approved by

KSI KSI HJH

A3

1/1

Revision

H

1:2

Scale

Size

Sheet

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45

Checked by

AAS/JSR JSR KKS

Connection box for GC-300-K__ w. Kongsberg flange for temperature sensors

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Part No. contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. © Kongsberg Maritime 2008

GL-300

Project / Product name

Trondheim

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS

Title

Surface: Ra 3,2

Designed by

Surface treatment:

DESCRIPTION

STS STS STS Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

DATE

2013-05-07 Text update 2011-08-03 Remark - and title block text changes 2010-06-07 Shrink tubes removed +32.5

Deck interface is according to adapter and protection pipe. See drawing MN-4567

REMARKS: ASSEMBLY DRAWING : GC-217

Weight: 1.3 kg Protection: IP67 Materials: AISI 316L Cable: Min. Ø8 - Max. Ø15 Input 1 - 3 x PT1000 (PT100) Output: Hart 1 twisted pair

0: No flexible protection to be installed 1: Flexible protection tube: Adapter GL-2519 added for use with flexible protection tube GL-1387

M: PT1000 U: PT100 FLEXIBLE PROTECTION TUBE OPTION

Material:

REV.

H G E

Ordering key: GC-300-

Optional flexible protection tube adapter

Cable gland ( 8-15 mm)

J: JIS DN65 5K K: Kongsberg flange type needs adapter UP-1052, UP-1060 or 353167 TEMPERATURE ELEMENT TYPE

FLANGE TYPE

7

1

5

4 3

6

2

Trondheim Project number

Threads: 6g/6H

GC-222

INSTALLATION DRAWING

Drawing type

Approved by

KSI HJH HJH KSI

Revision

D

1:2

A3

1(3) Scale

Size

Sheet

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45

Checked by

AAS AAS BMF HBE

Installation of GC-300 connection box with temperature sensors FRAMO pump installation

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. © Kongsberg Maritime 2008

GL-300

Project / Product name

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS

Title

Surface: Ra 3,2

Designed by

STS STS RKS STS

Surface treatment:

DESCRIPTION

Heat shrink hose and inst. remark "F" removed. Heat shrink hose as optional and flex tubes as alternativ Added Connection diagram as sheet 3 First edition

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

DATE

2011-03-29 2010-06-07 25.11.2009 2009-03-11 Material:

REV.

D C B A

DRAWINGS: Installation of MN1535 temperature sensors: See sheet 2 Connection diagram: See sheet 3 Preparation of temperature main cable: GC-224

5: If connection box wiring occur later, put back the cover with electronics and gasket[2] and fasten the tension ring.

4: Fasten GC-300 connection box by using the 4 bolts(UNBRACO)[4] and washers[3] placed inside the connection box. 6mm hex key(UNBRACO). Torque: 40 Nm.

3: Make sure that the adapter[7] gasket area is clean. Place the gasket [6] on top of adapter [7]. Then place the GC-300 connection box [5] correctly oriented on top of the gasket.

2: Unscrew tension ring nut [1] with a 10 mm wrench key, and remove tension ring. Then remove cover [2] with gasket and electronics and put them on a safe dry place.

1: FRAMO pump [7] and the temperature sensor protection pipe beneath the pump flange are made and assembled/welded by pump supplier.

INSTALLATION OF GC-300 CONNECTION BOX:

1

2

Fig. 1

5

6

3

4

7

Fig. 2

A Fig. 3

A

~40

8

B Fig. 4

B

GL-300

Trondheim Project number

Designed by

STS STS RKS STS

Threads: 6g/6H

GC-222_2

INSTALLATION DRAWING

Approved by

KSI HJH HJH KSI

Revision

D

1:2

A3

2(3) Scale

Size

Sheet

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45

Checked by

AAS AAS BMF HBE

Installation of MN1535-sensor in GC-300 Connection box FRAMO pump installation Drawing type

Title

Surface: Ra 3,2

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. © Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Project / Product name

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS

DESCRIPTION

Heat shrink hose and ins. remark "F" removed. Heat shrink hose as optional and flex tubes as alternativ Added Connection diagram as sheet 3 First edition AISI 316L

DATE

2010-11-22 2010-06-07 25.11.2009 2009-03-11

Surface treatment:

Material:

REV.

D C B A

Flex tube option: See drawing GL-2626/2

E. Connect wires according to connection diagram on drawing GC-223_3

D. Then lift the tool until it engages the nut [6][Fig. 4] and fasten it. Torque 25 Nm. Repeat the prosedure on the middle sensor MN1535 and upper MN1535.

C. Push the sensor end of the longest Temperature sensor MN1535 [3] through the tread hole in the GC-300 connection box bottom[Fig. 1], Enter the mantle nipple treads[4] by hand[Fig. 2]push the wires through the installation tool [8] and lower the tool over the nut [6], ring [5], and mantle nipple [4][Fig. 3] and fasten the nipple. Torque: 30 Nm.

B. Remove the extra blindplug [7]. They are needed when the number of Temperature sensors are less then three.

A. Unscrew the tension ring nut and put the ring and connection box cover on a safe and clean place. Prepare and install the main temperature cable[1] according to drawing GC-224. Inspect that the main cable screen is evenly distributed before fastening the screen clamp[2].

MN1535 installation.

X4

2

1

2

3

1

4

3 1 2 3

2

4

1

4

X1

X3

X2

Pt100 or PT1000

Trondheim Project number

1

Blue

2 1

Blue Blue

Designed by

Threads: 6g/6H

GC-222_3

INSTALLATION DRAWING

Drawing type

Connection wiring diagram for GC-300 FRAMO pump installation

Surface: Ra 3,2 Title

Approved by

HJH HJH

Revision

A3

D

3(3) Scale

Size

Sheet

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45

Checked by

AAS BMF

3

Yellow

STS RKS STS

4

Yellow

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. © Kongsberg Maritime 2008

GL-300

Project / Product name

Merchant Marine Division

DESCRIPTION

Kongsberg Maritime AS

Welded Steel Mild

DATE

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

Black

Yellow

4-wire connection

2010-06-07 Heat shrink tube as optional and flex tubes as alternativ 25.11.2009 Added Connection diagram as sheet 3 2009-03-20 First edition

Surface treatment:

Material:

REV.

C B A

Yellow

3-wire connection

Pt100 or PT1000

PT1000

Yellow

2-wire connection

Pt1000 Ω/0C or PT100 Ω/0C

ELEMENT TYPE

A

B

C

D

~200

5

~30

Screen

n15

Gland: M20x1.5 Cable range- Min. Ø8 -max. Ø15

6

5

4

3. If cable outside diameter is larger than 10.5 mm, remove the inner ring of the gland gasket with a screwdriver. Insert the cable until the outer mantle is aligned with the inner edge of the gland and remove the tape.

n10.5

4

Cable mantle end Gland gasket inner ring Gland gasket outer ring Gland nut

2. Tape the cable screen before inserting the cable

Tape

1. Strip the cable. Dimension range: Ø8- Ø15

6

Screen clamp

2

1

A

DESCRIPTION

STS

Trondheim Project number

3

2

GC-224

INSTALLATION DRAWING

Drawing type

KSI Approved by

1

A4

Revision

A

1:2

Scale

Size

Sheet

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45~

Checked by

HBE

B(2:1)

Cable preparation GC-300

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. © Kongsberg Maritime 2008

GL-300

Project / Product name

Merchant Automation Offshore & Marine Division

Title

Surface: Ra 3,2

Threads: 6g/6H

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

Designed by

Surface treatment:

Kongsberg Maritime AS

DATE

2009-03-13 First edition

B

Material:

REV.

Fig.1

4. Tighten the gland nut until the gasket is sorrounding cable tight and oozing between the cable mantle and nut[Fig. 1]. ~Torque 5 Nm. Fold the cable screens back distributed evenly over the gland inner surface, and fasten the screen clamp.

3

A

B

C

D

1.5

90.0°

n85.0 n60 `0.3

+ 0.5

n30 0.0

+ 0.3

n13 0.0

3 2 1 ITEM B A

1 Gasket type UY-148/3 1 Gasket type UY-148/2 1 Gasket type UY-148/1 QTY DESCRIPTION

UY-148/3 UY-148/2 UY-148/1 PART NUMBER Parts List

novaflon 300 GORETEX 0-0DIN28091 Nitril MATERIAL

05.11.2010 Added novaflon 300 option 2008-12-10 First edition

REV.

DATE

Material:

AAS STS Designed by

DESCRIPTION

* See partslist above

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

Surface treatment:

Surface: Ra 3,2

Merchant Automation Offshore & Marine Division

GL-300

Approved by

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45~

Gasket type UY-148 for temperature sensor unit GC-300

Sheet

1(1) Size

A4 Scale

Trondheim Project / Product name

Checked by

KSI HBE

Threads: 6g/6H

Title

Kongsberg Maritime AS

HJH STP

1:1 Project number

Drawing type

DETAIL DRAWING

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. © Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Revision

UY-148

B

GC-300 tank temp. for Deck inst. For Residual Tank

A

B

C

D

~200

5

~30

Screen

n15

Gland: M20x1.5 Cable range- Min. Ø8 -max. Ø15

6

5

4

3. If cable outside diameter is larger than 10.5 mm, remove the inner ring of the gland gasket with a screwdriver. Insert the cable until the outer mantle is aligned with the inner edge of the gland and remove the tape.

n10.5

4

Cable mantle end Gland gasket inner ring Gland gasket outer ring Gland nut

2. Tape the cable screen before inserting the cable

Tape

1. Strip the cable. Dimension range: Ø8- Ø15

6

Screen clamp

2

1

A

DESCRIPTION

STS

Trondheim Project number

3

2

GC-224

INSTALLATION DRAWING

Drawing type

KSI Approved by

1

A4

Revision

A

1:2

Scale

Size

Sheet

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45~

Checked by

HBE

B(2:1)

Cable preparation GC-300

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. © Kongsberg Maritime 2008

GL-300

Project / Product name

Merchant Automation Offshore & Marine Division

Title

Surface: Ra 3,2

Threads: 6g/6H

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

Designed by

Surface treatment:

Kongsberg Maritime AS

DATE

2009-03-13 First edition

B

Material:

REV.

Fig.1

4. Tighten the gland nut until the gasket is sorrounding cable tight and oozing between the cable mantle and nut[Fig. 1]. ~Torque 5 Nm. Fold the cable screens back distributed evenly over the gland inner surface, and fasten the screen clamp.

3

A

B

C

D

6

5

3.1 3.2

1

2

4

7

Project number / Item ID

Merchant Marine Division Trondheim

AAS AAS Checked by

STS STS STS Designed by

GC-223

Installation drawing

Drawing type

temperature sensors.

connection box with

Installation of GC-300-K_type

Title

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. © Kongsberg Maritime

GL-300

DESCRIPTION

Kongsberg Maritime AS

DATE

2013-10-17 Loctite 542 added and text corrections 2011-09-01 Title field and text update 2009-03-11 First edition

Project / Product name

REV.

F E A

DRAWINGS: Adapter and protection pipe: MN-4511 Installation of temperature sensors: See drawing GC-223_2 Preparation of temperature main cable: GC-224 Connection diagram: GC-223_3

F

-

A3

1 of 3

Revision

Scale

Size

Sheet

Approved by

KSI KSI

6. When all wiring is completed and this is the last step in installation, take silica gel [7] out of plastic bag and place the silica gel inside the connection box.

5: If connection box wiring occur later, put back the cover [2] with electronics and gasket, silica gel plastic bag [7] and fasten the tension ring.

4: Fasten GC-300 connection box by using the 4 unbraco bolts [3.1] and washers [3.2] placed inside the connection box. 6 mm unbraco key. Torque: 40 Nm.

3: Make sure that the adapter [6] gasket area is clean. Place the gasket [5] on top of adapter [6]. Then place the GC-300-K__ connection box [4] correctly oriented on top of the gasket.

2: Unscrew tension ring nut [1] with a 10 mm wrench, and remove tension ring. Then remove cover [2] with gasket and electronics and put them on a safe place.

Option: No transfer heat liquid when fast temperature respons time is not relevant.

1: Inspect that the adapter [6] and the sensor protection pipe beneath are made, assembled/welded and leakage tested according to drawing MN-4511. NB! Prior to installation: Inspect and make sure that the protection pipe contain no water. Heat transfer liquid is only needed when fast temperature response time is required. Heat transfer liquid specification: The transfer liquid must; * Suit the cargo temperature. -Not to freeze or crystallize in the temperature range. -Not to boil in the temperature range * Not corrode the sensors and pipe * Not be harmful to the cargo

INSTALLATION OF GC-300 CONNECTION BOX:

Fig. 1

15

8

13.2

13.1

Fig. 2

12

11

10

38

14

9

Fig. 3

A

7

A

~40

B

Fig. 4

B

Project number / Item ID

Merchant Marine Division Trondheim

AAS AAS Checked by

STS STS STS Designed by

GC-223

Installation drawing

Drawing type

temperature sensors.

connection box with

Installation of GC-300-K_type

Title

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. © Kongsberg Maritime

GL-300

DESCRIPTION

Kongsberg Maritime AS

DATE

2013-10-17 Loctite 542 added and text corrections 2011-09-01 Title field and text update 2009-03-11 First edition

Project / Product name

REV.

F E A

Flex tube options: See drawing 369738, 384083 and 384010.

F

-

A3

2 of 3

Revision

Scale

Size

Sheet

Approved by

KSI KSI

F. When all wiring is completed and this is the last step in installation, take silica gel [7] out of plastic bag and place the silica gel inside the connection box.

E. Connect wires according to connection diagram on drawing GC-223_3

C. Then lift the tool until it engages the nut [11] [Fig. 4] and fasten it. Torque 25 Nm. Repeat the procedure on the middle temperature sensor and upper temperature sensor. If less than 3 temperature sensors, install blindplug(s) [14] in the free thread hole(s). Apply Loctite 542 [13.2] on the blindplug(s) threads. Fasten the blindplug(s). Torque: 30 Nm.

B. Push the sensor end of the longest Temperature sensor [10] through the tread hole in the GC-300 connection box bottom [Fig. 1]. Apply Loctite 542 [13.2] on mantle nipple threads before entering the mantle nipple [13.1] by hand [Fig. 2] push the wires through the installation tool [9] and lower the tool over the nut [11], ring [12], and mantle nipple [13.1] [Fig. 3] and fasten the nipple. Torque: 30 Nm.

A. Unscrew the tension ring nut and put the ring and connection box cover on a safe and clean place. Prepare and install the main temperature cable[13] according to drawing GC-224. Inspect that the main cable screen is evenly distributed before fastening the screen clamp [8].

Temperature sensor installation.

Blue

Blue

Yellow

Yellow

4-wire connection

X4

Yellow

HART + HART -

1 2

Yellow

X1 = Top X2 = Middle X3 = Bottom

X2

1 2 3 4

X1

2-wire connection

X3

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 Project number / Item ID

Merchant Marine Division Trondheim

1

Blue

Checked by

1 Blue

Designed by

2 Blue

AAS AAS

3

Yellow

STS STS STS

4

Yellow

GC-223

Installation drawing

Drawing type

temperature sensors.

connection box with

Installation of GC-300-K_type

Title

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

Black

Yellow

4-wire connection

Pt100 or PT1000

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. © Kongsberg Maritime

GL-300

DESCRIPTION

Kongsberg Maritime AS

DATE

2013-10-17 Loctite 542 added and text corrections 2011-09-01 Title field and text update 2009-03-11 First edition

Project / Product name

REV.

F E A

Yellow

3-wire connection

Pt100 or PT1000

PT1000

Yellow

2-wire connection

Pt1000 Ω/0C or PT100 Ω/0C

ELEMENT TYPE

F

-

A3

3 of 3

Revision

Scale

Size

Sheet

Approved by

KSI KSI

79.2

~151

32.5

11

60

90°

91

ATEX Scheduled document. No modification permitted without reference to the Notified Body

89

Project number

Threads: 6g/6H

GC-300-K__

GC-218

Document ID

DIMENSIONAL SKETCH

Drawing type

Approved by

KSI KSI HJH

A3

1/1

Revision

H

1:2

Scale

Size

Sheet

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45

Checked by

AAS/JSR JSR KKS

Connection box for GC-300-K__ w. Kongsberg flange for temperature sensors

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Part No. contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. © Kongsberg Maritime 2008

GL-300

Project / Product name

Trondheim

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS

Title

Surface: Ra 3,2

Designed by

Surface treatment:

DESCRIPTION

STS STS STS Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

DATE

2013-05-07 Text update 2011-08-03 Remark - and title block text changes 2010-06-07 Shrink tubes removed +32.5

Deck interface is according to adapter and protection pipe. See drawing MN-4567

REMARKS: ASSEMBLY DRAWING : GC-217

Weight: 1.3 kg Protection: IP67 Materials: AISI 316L Cable: Min. Ø8 - Max. Ø15 Input 1 - 3 x PT1000 (PT100) Output: Hart 1 twisted pair

0: No flexible protection to be installed 1: Flexible protection tube: Adapter GL-2519 added for use with flexible protection tube GL-1387

M: PT1000 U: PT100 FLEXIBLE PROTECTION TUBE OPTION

Material:

REV.

H G E

Ordering key: GC-300-

Optional flexible protection tube adapter

Cable gland ( 8-15 mm)

J: JIS DN65 5K K: Kongsberg flange type needs adapter UP-1052, UP-1060 or 353167 TEMPERATURE ELEMENT TYPE

FLANGE TYPE

1.5

90.0°

n85.0 n60 `0.3

+ 0.5

n30 0.0

+ 0.3

n13 0.0

3 2 1 ITEM B A

1 Gasket type UY-148/3 1 Gasket type UY-148/2 1 Gasket type UY-148/1 QTY DESCRIPTION

UY-148/3 UY-148/2 UY-148/1 PART NUMBER Parts List

novaflon 300 GORETEX 0-0DIN28091 Nitril MATERIAL

05.11.2010 Added novaflon 300 option 2008-12-10 First edition

REV.

DATE

Material:

AAS STS Designed by

DESCRIPTION

* See partslist above

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

Surface treatment:

Surface: Ra 3,2

Merchant Automation Offshore & Marine Division

GL-300

Approved by

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45~

Gasket type UY-148 for temperature sensor unit GC-300

Sheet

1(1) Size

A4 Scale

Trondheim Project / Product name

Checked by

KSI HBE

Threads: 6g/6H

Title

Kongsberg Maritime AS

HJH STP

1:1 Project number

Drawing type

DETAIL DRAWING

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. © Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Revision

UY-148

B

NOTE 1

L

C C

B

B

A

A

E

E

2

2

3

C-C ( 1 : 1 )

E - E(1 : 1 )

Liquid proof sensor protection pipe (may be filled with e.g. transformer oil or other suitable liquid).

5

Cut this pipe end to obtain necessary length L of the protection pipe.

2

1

B-B ( 1 : 1 )

2

5

4

2

4

5

5

Project / Product name

Trondheim Project number

Merchant Marine Division

Designed by

Threads: 6g/6H

MN-4567

INSTALLATION DRAWING

Approved by

Revision

A3

C

1(2) Scale

Size

Sheet

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45~

Checked by

See MN-4567_2 AISI 316L AISI 316L AISI 316L AISI 316L MATERIAL STS KSI AAS KSI HJH AAS

Adapter and protection pipe for temperature sensor type MN-1535 GC-300 Drawing type

Title

Surface: Ra 3,2

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. © Kongsberg Maritime 2008

GL-300

DESCRIPTION

Kongsberg Maritime AS

Welded Steel Mild

DATE

Surface treatment:

Material:

REV.

5 Pipe suspension unit type MN-4567/2 4 Muff 3 Sensor pipe coin Ø27 x3 2 Sensor pipe "OD"33.4x"T"3.38 "L"6000 1 1 Adapter for GC-300 353167 ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER Distance between suspensions changed (NOTE 1) 21.12.2010 C AAS Adapter 353167 in and UP-1052 out-Adapter up-1074 out B 2010-11-16 STS A 2010-06-09 First edition STS

REMARKS: Make certain that the protection pipe is air tight. Checking the pipe for leaks may be done when pressure testing the tank. When the tank is pressurized, loosen one of the temperature sensors and use soap water to check if there is pressure in the pipe.

NOTE 1: Distance between pipe suspensions must be according to ship or classification society specification

A-A ( 1 : 2 )

95 `2

1

70.0

2

Trondheim Project number

YARD SUPPLY

MN-4567_2

INSTALLATION DRAWING

Drawing type The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. © Kongsberg Maritime 2008

GL-300

Project / Product name

Merchant Marine Division

Threads: 6g/6H

Approved by

Revision

A

1:1

A3

2(2) Scale

Size

Sheet

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45~

Checked by

AISI 316 AISI 316 AISI 316 AISI 316L AISI 316 MATERIAL HJH AAS

Pipe suspension unit type MN-4567_2

Title

Surface: Ra 3,2

Kongsberg Maritime AS

STS Designed by

Surface treatment:

DESCRIPTION

Yard supply Yard supply Yard supply Yard supply Yard supply VENDOR

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

DATE

4

3

Material:

REV.

5 2 M8 Nut 4 2 8mm Spring Lock Washers. 3 2 M8 x 20 Hex Screw 2 1 Pipe suspension 1 1 Suspension clamp ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION A 2010-06-09 First sdition

n34

5

+ 0.3 22 - 0.0 + 0.0 20 - 0.5

100 1

14

60 0.3

A

R2

90.0°

0.5 X 45.0° Chamfer

R2

R2

R2

Ø43 0.5

35.4 +- 0.5 0.0

A-A 4

A

26 0.0

+ 0.5

92 1

4x M10x1.5 - 6H

18.0

0.5 X 45.0° Chamfer

Ø30.7 +- 1 0

R8.0

5°

10.2

18

1.0 X 45.0° Chamfer

1,6

125

3

DESCRIPTION

Trondheim Project number

Designed by

STS STS

Threads: 6g/6H

353163

Document ID

Approved by

KSI KSI

A3

Revision

B

1:1

Scale

Size

1 of 1

Sheet

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45

Checked by

AAS AAS

DETAIL DRAWING

Adapter for GC-300 JIS25A pipe

353167

Drawing type

Title

Surface: Ra 3,2

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Part No. contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. © Kongsberg Maritime 2008

Project / Product name

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS

AISI 316L Passivation (18-25% HNO3)

DATE

2011-04-06 Hole depth 2010-09-28 First release

Surface treatment:

Material:

REV.

B A

Inspect that there is no pittholes and cavities.

Weight: 1kg.

REMARKS.

For installation with flex. Prot. Tubes

D

D

C

C

Wrench size 24 mm

1 2

M20x1.5

4

G 3/4-14

Wrench size 32 mm Wrench size 35 mm

D-D ( 1 : 2 )

Trondheim Project number

Threads: 6g/6H

ASSEMBLY DRAWING

GL-2626

HJH Approved by

A3

Revision

1:2

Scale

Size

A

2 of 2

Sheet

Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45~

Checked by

AAS

Welded AISI 316L MATERIAL

AISI 316

Installation utilizing Protection Hose on Radar Tank Gauge with M20 Nipple for cable Ø 8-15 mm (GL-2626/2) Drawing type

Title

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. © Kongsberg Maritime 2008

GL-300

Project / Product name

Merchant Marine Division

Kongsberg Maritime AS

STP Designed by

Surface: Ra 3,2

DESCRIPTION

Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

First release

PART NUMBER

Surface treatment:

DATE

Parts List

GL-1387 GL-2519 329245

Material:

08.06.2010

Protection Hose Protection hose adapter GL-1387 Gland M20x1.5 Cable ø8-15 GLA-300 Housing Nipple M20 DESCRIPTION A

1 1 1 1 QTY

REV.

4 3 2 1 ITEM

Protection hose venting holes downwards after mounting

C-C ( 1 : 2 )

3

M30x1.5

59

1x45

24.0 +- 0.0 0.3

A

B

B

A-A

1x45

32 +- 0.0 0.3

1x45

A

C

G 3/4-14 - A

17

28.5

22

C(5:1)

2 1x45

30

Project / Product name

GL-2519

Project number / Item ID

GL-2519

Detail Drawing

Drawing type

for Radar Tank Gauge

Inside M30 to outside G 3/4"

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. Kongsberg Maritime

GL300

Sheet

A3

1 of 1

B

Revision

1,5 : 1

Scale

Threads: 6g/6H

Mechant Marine Division Trondheim

Adapter type GL-2519

Title

Surface: Ra 3,2

Approved by

KSI HBE Broken edges: 0,1 - 0,5 x 45

Checked by

Designed by Tolerances unless otherwise stated: ISO2768-mK

Size

DESCRIPTION

ASD STP

BEL STS

D(4:1)

VIEW2 ( 1 : 1 )

Kongsberg Maritime AS

AISI 316

DATE

2012-10-23 Extended length of threads, new frame and title field. 2008-11-19 Released

Surface treatment:

Material:

REV.

B A

Remarks: Remove all burrs.

D

M30x1.5

B-B

13

24

35

6

12

10 2

CHAPTER 5

Distributed Processing Units

CHAPTER 6

Cabinets

138

138

254

375

463

50

BOTTOM VIEW

621

Over cover (t=2 mm) 3(636x86x2/4-M5)

Bed support (t=4 mm) 795x370/6- 16

715

FRONT VIEW

TOP/FREE SPACE REQUIREMENT

SIDE VIEW Max. 45

TOP

TOP

X MA

805

.0 90

1863

FREE SPACE IN FRONT OF CABINET

843

800

400 418

MECHANICAL DATA: Protection code: IP22 Material: Steel t2.2 Weight: Aprox. 170 kg

A

2011-10-18

REV.

DATE

INITIAL DESCRIPTION

TAM

AAS

KSI

Designed by

Checked by

Approved by

Yard/Hull No: Title

Kongsberg Maritime AS Merchant Marine Division Trondheim Project / Product name

K-GAUGE GL-300

Project number

Item no. 334364

Sheet

GLN-300/24 CARGO LEVEL SYSTEM

1 /1 Size

CABINET FOR MAX 24 GLK's

A4 Scale

w/TOUCH SCREEN COMPUTER

1:20

Drawing type

DIMENTIONAL SKETCH

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. Kongsberg Maritime

Revision

364414

A

MOUNTINGPLATE WITH MAX NUMBER OF COMPONENTS

UNMANAGED SWITCH

24 VDC POWER SUPPLY

U2

U1

X4 GLK-300 1-8 CAN ETHERNET GATEWAY

FAN HOUSING (FAN 1-2)

FX10

X1

F40,F30

X4 GLK-300 9-16 FAN HOUSING (FAN 3-4) X2 X4

GLK-300 17-24

X3 CABLE DUCT 60x80

X4

CABLE DUCT 60x80

FAN HOUSING (FAN 5-6) DPUs

DZ-110

I.S BAR SAFE CABLES

EX CABLES B

2011-10-25

REV.

DATE

MOVED SOCKET OUTLET AND RENAMED POWER SUPPLY DESCRIPTION

TAM

AAS

KSI

Designed by

Checked by

Approved by

Yard/Hull No: Title

Sheet

Kongsberg Maritime AS

GLN-300/24 CARGO LEVEL SYSTEM

Merchant Marine Division Trondheim

MOUNTINGPLATE INSIDE CABINET

Project / Product name

K-GAUGE GL-300

Project number

Item no. 334364

1 /1 Size

A4 Scale

FOR MAX 24 GLK's

1:10

Drawing type

LAYOUT

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. Kongsberg Maritime

Revision

364416

B

13.3" IPC Touch screen Computer

BOTTOM VIEW

Cables max. 2.5 mm Terminal label M5 fastening screw

REAR VIEW

215

SIDE VIEW Gasket

256

FRONT VIEW

7 396

364

65

IO LABEL TERMINAL LABEL (SCALE 1:1.7)

IO LABEL (SCALE 1:1.7)

CUTOUT 5.5

POWER SUPPLY: DUAL 24 VDC MAXIMUM POWER CONSUMPTION: 50W WEIGHT: 5 kg IP RATING: FRONT IP66, BACK IP20 COLOUR: BLACK, RAL 9000

239 215

4x

.3 R1 335 364 E

2012-03-13

REV.

DATE

CO14538 DESCRIPTION

TAM

ES

KHL

Designed by

Checked by

Approved by

Yard/Hull No: Title

Kongsberg Maritime AS Merchant Marine Division Horten

Sheet

13" IPC Touch screen computer

1 /1 Size

A4 Scale

1:7 Project / Product name

Project number

Item no. 349998

Drawing type

Outline

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the communication of its Document ID contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of grant of a patent, utility model or design. Kongsberg Maritime

Revision

350012

E

Serial Interface

MODBUS Protocol K-Gauge GL-300 Cargo Level System

Yard / Hull: HMD H2511-2522 HMD H2541-2552 KM ref no: i033802 Project mgr: HCK Project eng: GSS

16-bit integer Addr. Reg. type 000 3 001 3 002 3 003 3 004 3 005 3 006 3 007 3 008 3 009 3 010 3 011 3 012 3 013 3 014 3 015 3

Data Cargo Tank 1P Cargo Tank 1S Cargo Tank 2P Cargo Tank 2S Cargo Tank 3P Cargo Tank 3S Cargo Tank 4P Cargo Tank 4S Cargo Tank 5P Cargo Tank 5S Cargo Tank 6P Cargo Tank 6S Cargo Tank 7P Cargo Tank 7S Slop Tank P Slop Tank S

Description Ullage Ullage Ullage Ullage Ullage Ullage Ullage Ullage Ullage Ullage Ullage Ullage Ullage Ullage Ullage Ullage

Unit m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m

Dec 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Cargo Tank 1P Cargo Tank 1S Cargo Tank 2P Cargo Tank 2S Cargo Tank 3P Cargo Tank 3S Cargo Tank 4P Cargo Tank 4S Cargo Tank 5P Cargo Tank 5S Cargo Tank 6P Cargo Tank 6S Cargo Tank 7P Cargo Tank 7S Slop Tank P Slop Tank S

Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level Level

m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Cargo Tank 1P Cargo Tank 1S Cargo Tank 2P Cargo Tank 2S Cargo Tank 3P Cargo Tank 3S Cargo Tank 4P Cargo Tank 4S Cargo Tank 5P Cargo Tank 5S Cargo Tank 6P Cargo Tank 6S Cargo Tank 7P Cargo Tank 7S Slop Tank P

Bottom Temp Bottom Temp Bottom Temp Bottom Temp Bottom Temp Bottom Temp Bottom Temp Bottom Temp Bottom Temp Bottom Temp Bottom Temp Bottom Temp Bottom Temp Bottom Temp Bottom Temp

degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

615 616

3 3

Slop Tank S Residual Tank

Bottom Temp Bottom Temp

degr.C degr.C

1 1

800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Cargo Tank 1P Cargo Tank 1S Cargo Tank 2P Cargo Tank 2S Cargo Tank 3P Cargo Tank 3S Cargo Tank 4P Cargo Tank 4S Cargo Tank 5P Cargo Tank 5S Cargo Tank 6P Cargo Tank 6S Cargo Tank 7P Cargo Tank 7S Slop Tank P Slop Tank S

Middle Temp Middle Temp Middle Temp Middle Temp Middle Temp Middle Temp Middle Temp Middle Temp Middle Temp Middle Temp Middle Temp Middle Temp Middle Temp Middle Temp Middle Temp Middle Temp

degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Cargo Tank 1P Cargo Tank 1S Cargo Tank 2P Cargo Tank 2S Cargo Tank 3P Cargo Tank 3S Cargo Tank 4P Cargo Tank 4S Cargo Tank 5P Cargo Tank 5S Cargo Tank 6P Cargo Tank 6S Cargo Tank 7P Cargo Tank 7S Slop Tank P Slop Tank S Residual Tank

Avg. Liq. Temp Avg. Liq. Temp Avg. Liq. Temp Avg. Liq. Temp Avg. Liq. Temp Avg. Liq. Temp Avg. Liq. Temp Avg. Liq. Temp Avg. Liq. Temp Avg. Liq. Temp Avg. Liq. Temp Avg. Liq. Temp Avg. Liq. Temp Avg. Liq. Temp Avg. Liq. Temp Avg. Liq. Temp Avg. Liq. Temp

degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C degr.C

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Cargo Tank 1P Cargo Tank 1S Cargo Tank 2P Cargo Tank 2S Cargo Tank 3P Cargo Tank 3S Cargo Tank 4P Cargo Tank 4S Cargo Tank 5P Cargo Tank 5S Cargo Tank 6P Cargo Tank 6S Cargo Tank 7P Cargo Tank 7S Slop Tank P Slop Tank S

I.G Press I.G Press I.G Press I.G Press I.G Press I.G Press I.G Press I.G Press I.G Press I.G Press I.G Press I.G Press I.G Press I.G Press I.G Press I.G Press

mBar mBar mBar mBar mBar mBar mBar mBar mBar mBar mBar mBar mBar mBar mBar mBar

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1500 1501 1502

3 3 3

Cargo Tank 1P Cargo Tank 1S Cargo Tank 2P

Mani. Line. Press Mani. Line. Press Mani. Line. Press

Bar Bar Bar

2 2 2

1503 1504 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Cargo Tank 2S Cargo Tank 3P Cargo Tank 3S Cargo Tank 4P Cargo Tank 4S Cargo Tank 5P Cargo Tank 5S Cargo Tank 6P Cargo Tank 6S Cargo Tank 7P Cargo Tank 7S Slop Tank P Slop Tank S

Mani. Line. Press Mani. Line. Press Mani. Line. Press Mani. Line. Press Mani. Line. Press Mani. Line. Press Mani. Line. Press Mani. Line. Press Mani. Line. Press Mani. Line. Press Mani. Line. Press Mani. Line. Press Mani. Line. Press

Bar Bar Bar Bar Bar Bar Bar Bar Bar Bar Bar Bar Bar

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

2600 2601 2602 2603

3 3 3 3

N2 Gas Main Residual Tank Ballast pump P Ballast pump S

Line Press Line Press Line Press Line Press

Bar Bar Bar Bar

2 2 2 2

2800 2801 2802 2803 2804 2805 2806 2807

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Atmospheric pressure Trim List Draft fore at mark Draft aft at mark Draft port at mark Draft starboard at mark Seawater density

ATM Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Density

mBar m degr. m m m m t/m3

0 3 2 3 3 3 3 3

CHAPTER 7

Uninterrupted Power Supplies - UPS

CHAPTER 8

Manuals

Installation guide

Installation Guide GL-300 Installation guide for mounting the GLA-300 and GC-300 GL-300 的安装指南 GL-300 설치 가이드 GL-300 の取付要領書

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

1

GL-300

Revisions

Rev. A B C D

Written by Date 2010-02-15 2010-04-07 2010-09-06 2010-12-15

Checked by Date 2010-02-15 2010-04-07 2010-09-06 2010-12-15

Sign. BMF BMF BMF BMF

Sign. JIP/ZQP AAS RKS AAS

Approved by Date 2010-02-19 2010-04-07 2010-09-06 2010-12-15

Sign. HJH HJH HJH KSI

Document history

Rev. A Rev. B Rev. C Rev. D

First edition Added Japanese translation, and new picture concerning earth grounding. Added list of tools, and corrected connection drawing on page 9. Removed shrink hose from GLA-300 and GC-300.

The following tools are required: •

Torque wrench

•

2 x 30 mm spanner

•

1 screwdriver flat small (3mm)

•

1 screwdriver flat medium (8mm)

•

1 big adjustable spanner for the flexible hose.

•

1 13 mm spanner

•

1 pc. rug for cleaning gasket surfaces and gaskets

•

1 wire cutter

•

1 wire stripper.

The information contained in this document is subject to change without prior notice. Kongsberg Maritime AS shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this document. © 2010 Kongsberg Maritime AS. All rights reserved. No part of this work covered by the copyright hereon may be reproduced or otherwise copied without prior permission from Kongsberg Maritime AS.

Kongsberg Maritime AS NO-7005 Trondheim Norway

2

Telephone: +47 73 58 10 00 Telefax: +47 73 58 10 01 www.kongsberg.com E-mail: [email protected]

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

Installation guide

GLA-300 – Radar Tank Gauge installation

Socket flange cleaning 清洁雷达筒法兰 소켓 프렌지를 청결하게 한다. ソケットフランジの汚れを除去する。

Gasket preparation 放置垫圈。 오링 혹은 가스켓 상태를 확인한다. ガスケットを取り付ける。

Antenna direction relative to inspection hatch. Standard orientation. 雷达方向相对检查舱盖。预设的方向。 안테나 방향과 점검용 해치와의 관계. 기본 방향. アンテナの方向は検査口に相対とする。 標準の位置（方向）は左図。

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

3

GL-300

Antenna direction relative to inspection hatch. Alternative orientation. 雷达方向相对检查舱盖。替代的方向。 안테나 방향과 점검용 해치와의 관계. 다른 방향. アンテナの方向は検査口に相対とする。 標準と反対方向の位置でも可。

Place the GLA-300 antenna unit carefully on the socket and make sure that the gasket stays in correct position. 将 GLA-300 雷达单元小心的放在雷达筒上，确 保垫圈保持在正确的位置。 GLA-300 유니트를 조심스럽게 소켓에 놓으며, 가스켓이 올바른 위치에 있는지 확인한다. アンテナユニットを注意しながらソケットの 上に置き、ガスケットが正しい位置に有る事 を確認する。

4

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

Installation guide

For earth grounding, two of the bolts must have lockers on both side of type “toothed washer” 为了接地要求，两个螺栓与相应的螺母需要用 齿垫圈锁紧。 접지용 전선을 고정하는 2 개의 볼트는 양쪽면에 고정용으로, 홈이 있는 와셔(이붙이 와셔)를 사용해야 한다. x2

アース用の二本のボルトは両側に歯（ギザギ ザ）が付いたロックワッシャー付でなければ ならない。

Tighten bolts in numbered order, first loosely. 按图示数字顺序拧紧螺栓。先适当拧紧螺栓， 后使用力矩扳手拴紧 볼트를 그림과 같은 순서로 천천히 조인다 番号順にボルトを締める、最初はゆるく。

Tighten bolts in numbered order. Torque 100 Nm. 按图示数字顺序拧紧螺栓。先适当拧紧螺栓， 后使用力矩扳手拴紧，扭矩 100Nm。 볼트를 그림과 같은 순서로 천천히 조인다.(토크:100Nm) 番号順にボルトを締める。締付トルクは 100Nm。 P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

5

GL-300

Remove the protection cap prior to cable insertion 插入电缆之前先拿掉保护罩。 케이블 삽입 전에 보호용 캡을 제거한다. ケーブルを挿入する前に、保護キャップを外 す。

6

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

Installation guide

Alternative installation with flexible protection hose

Adapter for flexible hose 软管接头示意 후렉시블 호스용 어뎁터 フレキシブルホース用アダプター。

Fasten the cable gland, and finalize with fasten the flex hose adapter. 把紧填料函，并且把紧软管接头。 케이블용 글랜드를 조이고, 후렉시블 호스용 어뎁터를 조여 마무리 한다. ケーブルグランドをしめた上で、フレキシブ ルホースのアダプターをしめる。

Fasten the flexible hose and make sure the drain hole is positioned downwards 连接并把紧保护软管，注意确保泄放孔朝下。 후렉시블 호스를 조이고, 드레인 홀이 아래로 향하도록 한다. フレキシブルホースをしめ、排水孔が下に向 いていることを確認する。

Alternative with flexible hose on cable 图示为用软管保护电缆。（可选） 전선에 후렉시블 호스를 사용한 설치예 フレキシブルホース付ケーブルも別方法。

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

7

GL-300 Visual inspection

Tighten the cable gland nut so the rubber sealing inside is compressed around the cable. This is very important to ensure a water tight connection through the gland. 将电缆填料函拧紧使里面的橡胶密封圈压紧覆 盖电缆。这是让电缆填料函防水的重要步骤。 내부의 고무패킹이 금속 케이블을 누를때까지 케이블 글랜드 너트를 조인다. 정확하게 조이는 것은 글랜드를 통한 침수를 예방하기 위해 매우 중요하다. ラバーシールの内側が電線外皮の回りを押え る様にケーブルグランドナットを締める。 これはグランド部の水密性を確実にする為に 非常に大切な事である。

8

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

Installation guide

Ship cable outer mantle must go through the cable gland. 电缆的外绝缘必须穿过填料函。 선박 케이블 보호용 외피는 반드시 케이블 글랜드로 들어가야 한다. シップケーブルの外皮はケーブルグランドを 通る事。

Fold the cable screen back distributed evenly over the gland inner surface, and fasten the screen clamp. 将电缆金属屏蔽层往后平均分布于填料函表面 后压紧，之后用夹具将电缆保护外缘拴紧。 케이블 스크린을 뒤로 젖혀 글랜드 내부 금속 와셔 표면에 케이블 스크린이 골고루 분포될수 있도록 한다. 스크류드라이버를 이용하여 스크린 클램프를 정확히 조인다. ケーブルスクリーンをグランド内側表面上に 平均に分けて後ろに折り込む、そしてスクリ ーンクランプを締める。

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

9

10

GL-300

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

Radar and temperature connection drawing

Installation guide

Use a wire stripper and remove 10 mm of the insulation 使用剥线钳剥掉 10 毫米长的绝缘层。 전선용 스트립퍼(피복제거기)를 이용해서 전선 피복을 10mm 제거한다. ワイヤストリッパーを使い、保護絶縁カバー を 10ｍｍはがす。

Make sure the copper cores are neatly twisted 确保铜芯线较好的拧成一股，无分叉。 구리 전선이 보기 좋게 꼬이도록 한다. 銅線がきちんと巻かれているかを確認する。

Insert the wires into the plug, and push it as far down as possible. Then release the locking mechanisme. 用螺丝刀顶住黄色闭锁器，同时把电线插入插 孔，尽可能把线插到底部，然后松掉闭锁器。 전선을 플러그에 삽입하며 최대한 밀어 넣는다. 이후 고정 장치를 복원한다. 銅線をプラグにきっちりと差込み、ロックを 外す。 All 6 cables connected. 图示为连接好的 6 芯电缆。 6 가닥 모두를 연결한다. 6 本すべての電線が接続されている。

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

11

GL-300 Any spare cables must be sealed 任何备用电线必须用绝缘胶布分别包好。 여분의 케이블은 반드시 테이핑으로 마무리 한다. 予備電線は縛った状態にしておく。

Open Silica gel zip-bag, remove plastic bag and put Silica gel inside house. 取出塑料袋包装内的硅胶包，将硅胶包放在雷 达传感器内部。 실리카겔 지퍼백을 개봉하고, 지퍼백은 버린후 실리카겔은 안쪽 커버 위에 둔다. シリカゲル入りジッパー袋を開けて、プラス チックの袋を外し、シリカゲルを中に入れ る。

Strap the ship cables to the brackets on the adapter. 将电缆沿著支架固定。 선박용 전선을 브라켓에 그림과 같이 고정시킨다. シップケーブルをアダプター付きのブラケッ トに紐で固定する。

12

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

Installation guide

Check that gasket and sealing surface are free of wire cuts and burrs before closing radar. 在盖上雷达单元外盖之前，检查垫圈槽内是否 有剪断的电线和金属屏蔽线，若有任何杂物则 必须清洁干净，确保盖子盖上时垫圈有良好的 密封效果。 뚜껑을 닫기 전에 가스켓이나 덮게 표면에 전선토막이나 이물질이 없도록 깨끗이 한다. レーダー蓋を閉める前に、ガスケットとシー ルの表面にワイヤーの切屑や削り屑が無い事 を確認する。 When wiring and connections are completed, mount cover. 当接线完毕后，安放雷达单元外盖。 결선 작업이 완료되면 중심에 맞추어 정확하게 바깥쪽 커버를 씌운다. 線の接続が終われば、蓋を取り付ける。

Assemble the clamp 装上固定抱箍. 클램프를 체결한다 クランプを取り付ける

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

13

GL-300

Clamp assembly: First fit loosely on both sides. Adjust so distance “A” is equal on both sides after tightening. Torque 20 to 30 Nm. 拧紧固定抱箍，注意先要确保两边都要松的， 然后调整距离“A”并且上紧时保证两边等距, 如图示。扭距需在 20 到 30 Nm. 양쪽 크램프를 천천히 조인다. 이때 그림과 같이 A 의 길이가 양쪽 모두 동일하게 조절하여 조인다. 토크는 20 에서 30Nm クランプの取付：最初に両側に緩く合わせ る。締め付けた後 A の距離が両側で同じにな る様に調整する。締付トルクは 20~30Nm。

14

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

Installation guide

GC-300 –Tank temperature installation

Flange cleaning. 清洁基座法兰 소켓 프렌지를 청결케 한다. フランジの汚れを除去する。

Gasket preparation. 放置垫圈 오링 혹은 가스켓 상태를 확인한다. ガスケットを置く

Place the GC-300 unit carefully on the socket and make sure that the gasket stays in correct position. 将 GC-300 接线盒小心的放在基座法兰上，确 保垫圈保持在正确的位置。 GC-300 유니트를 조심스럽게 소켓에 놓으며, 가스켓이 올바른 위치에 있는지 확인한다. GC-300 ユニットをソケットの上に注意しな がら置き、ガスケットが正しい位置に有る事 を確認する。

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

15

GL-300

Tighten bolts, first loosely. Torque 40 Nm. 先适当拧紧螺栓，后使用力矩扳手拴紧，扭矩 40Nm。 처음에는 대각선 방향으로 돌아가며, 천천히 볼트들을 조인다. 토크는 40Nm ボルトを締める、最初は緩く。締付トルクは 40Nm。

Insert the temperature sensors. Start with the longest and finish with the shortest sensor. 把温度传感器穿入接线盒中。根据传感器长度 由长至短的顺序进行安装。 온도센서를 삽입한다. 가장 긴것을 처음에 가장 짧은것은 마지막에 설치한다. 温度センサーを挿入する。先ず最長のセンサ ーを、そして最後に最短のセンサーを挿入す る。

Lower the installation tool over the nut, ring and mantle nipple 放入长形套筒工具，穿过上端的卡套螺母且覆 盖最底部的接头。 설치공구가 너트, 링과 니플을 충분히 덮을수 있도록 내린다. ナット、リングそして覆ニップルの上から取 付具を下ろす。

16

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

Installation guide

Fasten the lowermost nipple, torque 30 Nm 拴紧最底部的接头。使用力矩扳手拴紧，扭矩 30Nm. 가장 아래쪽 니플을 조인다. 토크는 30Nm 最下のニップルを締める、トルクは 30Nm

Lift the tool and fasten the uppermost nut, torque 25 Nm. 将套筒工具向上提起，拴紧上方的卡套螺母， 力距 25Nm. 공구를 들어올려 바로위의 너트를 조인다. 토크는 25Nm 締め具を上げて最上のナットを締める、トル クは 25Nm。

Prepare the GC-300 cover 准备 GC-300 接线盒外盖 GC-300 덮개를 준비한다. GC-300 の蓋を用意する。

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

17

GL-300

Fold the cable screen back distributed evenly over the gland inner surface, and fasten the screen clamp. 将电缆金属屏蔽层往后平均分布于填料函表面 后压紧，之后用夹具将电缆保护外缘拴紧。 케이블 스크린을 뒤로 젖혀 글랜드 내부 금속 와셔 표면에 케이블 스크린이 골고루 분포될수 있도록 한다. 스크류드라이버를 이용하여 스크린 클램프를 정확히 조인다. ケーブルスクリーンをグランド内側表面に平 均に分けて後ろ側に折り込む、そしてスクリ －ンクランプを締める。

Connect the cables according to connection drawing. GC 223-3 And put silica gel bag in GC-300 house 依照 GC223-3 接线图连接信号线。并把硅胶包 放入 GC-300 接线盒内部。 결선도(GC 223-3)에 따라 전선을 연결한다. 그리고 GC-300 내부에 실리카겔 봉지를 넣는다. ケーブルを接続図 GC223-3 に従って接続す る。 そしてシリカゲルを GC-300 ケース内 に入れる。

18

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

Installation guide

Connection drawing GC 223-3

X1 :Top sensor X2: Middle sensor X3: Bottom sensor Mount the flex hose adapter, but don’t fasten it. 安装软管接头，先不要拧紧。 후렉시블 호스용 어뎁터를 연결한다. 단, 조이지는 마시오. しめずにフレキシブルホースのアダプターを のせる。 Fasten the cable gland, and finalize with fasten the flex hose adapter. 把紧填料函，并且把紧软管接头。 케이블용 글랜드를 조이고, 후렉시블 호스용 어뎁터를 조여 마무리 한다. 電線のグランドをしめた上で、フレキシブル ホースのアダプターをしめる。 P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

19

GL-300 Fasten the flexible hose and make sure the drain hole is positioned downwards 连接并把紧保护软管，注意确保泄放孔朝下。 후렉시블 호스를 조이고, 드레인 홀이 아래로 향하도록 한다. フレキシブルホースをしめ、排水孔が下に向 いていることを確認する。 Put on the clamp 放上固定抱箍 클램프를 체결한다. クランプを付ける

Fasten the tension ring. Torque 20 to 30 Nm 拴紧夹具 고정용 링을 조인다. 토크는 20 에서 30NM 20～30Nm のトルクで締付リングを締める。 GC-300 complete installed with protection hose 图示为安装保护软管的 GC-300 温度接线盒。 후렉시블 호스와 함께 설치가 완료된 GC300 모습. GC-300 はきちんと保護ホースと一緒に取り付 けられた状態になります。

20

P-GL300IN/DM Rev. D

User manual

User Manual GL-300 Tank Monitoring

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

1

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

Revisions

Rev. A B C D E F G

Written by Date 2009-04-15 2009-06-29 2009-10-27 2010-03-09 2010-04-09 2010-04-12 2011-05-12

Sign. KSI KSI KSI BMF OIT OIT BMF

Checked by Date 2009-04-16 2009-06-29 2009-11-12 2010-03-10 2010-04-09 2010-04-12 2011-05-13

Sign. BMF BMF BMF KSI BMF BMF KSI

Approved by Date 2009-04-17 2009-06-29 2009-11-12 2010-03-10 2010-04-09 2010-04-12 2011-05.13

Sign. BHJ BHJ BHJ BHJ BHJ HJH AAS

Document history

Rev. A Rev. B Rev. C Rev. D Rev. E Rev. F Rev. G

First edition Updated figures Updated figures and minor text changes Troubleshooting chapter expanded with fault descriptions Added instructions for changing broken GLK-300 by use of the Upgrade Handler program Corrections in chapter 2.2 Maintenance chapter updated.

The information contained in this document is subject to change without prior notice. Kongsberg Maritime AS shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this document. © 2010 Kongsberg Maritime AS. All rights reserved. No part of this work covered by the copyright hereon may be reproduced or otherwise copied without prior permission from Kongsberg Maritime AS.

Kongsberg Maritime AS NO-7005 Trondheim Norway

2

ATEX Related document Phone: +47 73 58 10 00 Fax: +47 73 58 10 01 www.kongsberg.com E-mail: [email protected]

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

Table of contents ABBREVIATIONS.......................................................................................................... 5 1 GENERAL INFORMATION ................................................................................. 6 1.1 The Radar Tank Gauge ........................................................................................... 6 1.1.1

Special condition for safe use. .................................................................... 7

1.1.2 GLA-300 marking ...................................................................................... 7 1.2 The Cargo Temperature Unit.................................................................................. 8 1.3 The Signal Processing Unit .................................................................................... 8 1.1 Topology................................................................................................................. 9 2 MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................... 10 2.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................... 10 2.2 Overview .............................................................................................................. 10 2.3 Service and maintenance of the RTG ................................................................... 10 2.4 Preventive maintenance ........................................................................................ 11 2.4.1

General...................................................................................................... 11

2.4.2

Weekly maintenance................................................................................. 12

2.4.3

3-monthly maintenance ............................................................................ 12

2.4.4 Yearly maintenance .................................................................................. 12 2.5 Deck installation ................................................................................................... 12 2.6 How to replace a broken SPU............................................................................... 14 2.6.1

Upgrade Handler software ........................................................................ 14

2.6.2

Upgrade Handler interface........................................................................ 15

2.6.3

Operational procedures ............................................................................. 16

3 TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................................................ 22 3.1 Power up the GLK’s after fault situation.............................................................. 24 3.2 Fault and fault presentation .................................................................................. 24 3.2.1

GLK-300 power failure ............................................................................ 24

3.2.2

Ethernet 1 broken...................................................................................... 25

3.2.3

Ethernet 2 broken...................................................................................... 26

3.2.4

Hart line between GLK and GLB broken ................................................ 27

3.2.5

GLB power failure .................................................................................... 28

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

3

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

3.2.6

RS-485 between GLK and GLB broken .................................................. 30

3.2.7

Temperature sensor failure ....................................................................... 32

3.2.8

GC-300 communication to GLK-300 broken ........................................... 33

3.2.9

Inert pressure failure ................................................................................. 35

4

FAQ ......................................................................................................................... 37

4

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

ABBREVIATIONS CTU:

Cargo Temperature Unit

EPDM:

Ethylene Propylene Diene M-class

ETH:

Ethernet

FEP:

Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene

GC-300:

Cargo Temperature Unit (CTU).

GLA-300: Radar Tank Gauge (RTG). GLK-300: Signal Processing Unit (SPU).

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

GS:

Gauge Socket.

IAS:

Integrated Alarm System

LED:

Light Emitting Diode

PTFE:

PolyTetraFluorEthylene.

ROS:

Remote Operator Station

RTG:

Radar Tank Gauge.

SPU:

Signal Processing Unit.

5

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

1 GENERAL INFORMATION GL-300 Tank Monitoring uses well established radar principles to provide accurate level measurements. An inert gas pressure transmitter is integrated in the Radar Tank Gauge, which also acts as a connection box for the Cargo Temperature Unit. The CTU shares the communication cable with the RTG. Advanced signal processing ensures accuracy and reliability. GL-300 Tank Monitoring mainly consists of: • The GLA-300 Radar Tank Gauge (RTG). • The GC-300 Cargo Temperature Unit (CTU). • The GLK-300 Signal Processing Unit (SPU). Each tank is equipped with one RTG and one CTU in hazardous area connected to the SPU in safe area. GL-300 Tank Monitoring consists of up to 60 SPU’s.

1.1 The Radar Tank Gauge The RTG is fitted to a Gauge Socket, mounted on top of the tank, leaving no parts of the system in physical contact with the tank content. The rugged construction of the RTG enables withstanding of severe mechanical, physical and chemical environmental conditions. Only AISI 316 acid-resistant steel and Teflon® (PTFE) are used.

Figure 1 GLA-300 Radar Tank Gauge

6

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

1.1.1 Special condition for safe use. From the GLA-300 ATEX certificate note the following:

The GL-2513 is included in the datasheet Glk300_ce.

1.1.2 GLA-300 marking The RTG unit are marked with an laser engraved label

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

7

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

1.2 The Cargo Temperature Unit The CTU consists of a transmitter that can interface up to three MN1535 PT-1000 temperature sensors. This unit is connected to the RTG and uses the same cable as the RTG between hazardous and safe area.

Figure 2 GC-300 Cargo Temperature Unit

1.3 The Signal Processing Unit One Signal Processing Unit (SPU), GLK-300, is required for each Radar Tank Gauge. The SPU located in the system cabinet, consists of the following: • Zener barriers, providing power to the RTG, digital interface (RS-485) handling measuring signals from the RTG, and HART communication for inert gas pressure and cargo temperature measurements. • Dual high speed Ethernet communication to Remote Operator Station (ROS).

Figure 3 GLK-300 Signal Processing Unit

8

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

1.1 Topology

Figure 4 GL-300 topology (example with 14 cargo tanks) The topology of GL-300 Tank Monitoring is in short described in the above figure. The connection of atmospheric pressure and draft sensors will vary with different projects. P-GL300/FE Rev. G

9

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

2 MAINTENANCE 2.1 Introduction This chapter explains how to keep the system in good working order and what to do if the system fails. The following subjects are covered: • Overview. • Preventive maintenance. • Troubleshooting of all parts of the system.

2.2 Overview This maintenance chapter is intended for trained maintenance technicians or engineers with experience of electronic and digital circuits, computers and electro mechanical design. The level of information is based on Kongsberg Maritime maintenance philosophy: The onboard technical personnel shall, with the help of the documentation and the system’s built-in test functions, be able to identify malfunctions, locate the fault, and replace major parts, modules and components on a “Line Replaceable Unit” (LRU) level. He/she will however not attempt to repair the LRUs. Note

Cleaning with abrasive material or strong chemical cleaning solutions is not recommended as these may damage the system.

2.3 Service and maintenance of the RTG Due to the modular system design and the complexity of the electronic circuitry, servicing the equipment if failures should occur will be limited to replacement of malfunctioning boards and complete electronics module assemblies. A member of the ship crew being adequately familiar with the GL-300 system may carry out replacement of boards.

10

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

The GLA-300 (RTG) Heavy contamination on the antenna PTFE feed and the mirror may cause erroneous readings. If the system gives bad readings it is needed to clean both the antenna feed and the mirror of the antenna. The feed and the mirror must then be cleaned by spraying with a cleaning agent if a jet nozzle is mounted on the tank adapter, or by opening the inspection hatch of the tank adapter and wipe off the feed and the mirror with a soft cloth (remark the special condition for safe use above). Liquid to be used depends on the liquid stored in the tank. If ice on the surfaces, use Isopropanol, or for other types of contamination use Petrol/Kerosene, Diesel etc. The feed is made of PTFE and can withstand almost all liquids. If failures should occur within the sensor unit electronics GLH300/GLH-310, the complete electronics unit (assembly) has to be replaced. A possible sensor electronics unit failure is indicated by error codes, together with the LED's on the front of the GLK-300 being lit. A description of how to replace a sensor electronics unit is attached to the spare unit.

2.4 Preventive maintenance 2.4.1 General Kongsberg Maritime recommends the following preventive maintenance routine for the Kongsberg Tank Gauging System:

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

• Weekly:

Clean all operator panels. Check fault page.

• 3-Monthly:

Clean filter in cabinet door (if exist). UPS/battery check.

• Yearly:

Check cables and cable entrances, electrical screw-terminals, fuse connections and plug connections.

11

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

2.4.2 Weekly maintenance Each week do the following for each of these Units: 1

Clean the surface of the units. Wipe the surfaces with a clean damp cloth. For heavier cleaning, use a clean, damp cloth which has been dipped in a solution of a mild dish detergent and water. Wring out firmly before wiping the unit. Never use cleaning solutions containing spirit or alcohol.

2

Check the fault page if there is any fault reported.

2.4.3 3-monthly maintenance Clean filter in cabinet door every 3 month UPS/battery check: 3

Switch off the battery charger/power supply (often used is Powec SC-8).

4

The battery capacity should be enough to run more than 15 minutes without any problem.

2.4.4 Yearly maintenance Visual inspection of system parts is recommended to prevent malfunctions and to ensure safe operation. 5

Check cables and cable entrances for damage to the cable.

6

Tighten all electrical screw-terminals.

7

Tighten all plug connections.

2.5 Deck installation In general, equipment on deck (GLA-300 and GC-300) and equipment inside the cabinet (GLK-300) do not need maintenance. If deck equipment needs cleaning, please observe that the following materials are used in the Radar Tank Gauge and the Cargo Temperature Unit on deck; • All steel is AISI 316. • Sealing materials are Nitril EPDM

12

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

In case of special combinations of environmental conditions outside and inside the tank, cleaning of the RTG antenna may be necessary. The antenna inside the tank is shown in the below figure, and has the following properties: • All steel is AISI 316. • PTFE in parabolic antenna. • O-ring material/type Kalrez 4079 and FEP. For the RTG to function, only the front of the PTFE feed and the mirror need to be sufficiently clean (depending on type and amount of contamination).

FEP O-ring

Mirror

Kalrez 4079 O-ring

PTFE feed

Figure 5 GLA-300 offset parabolic antenna The antenna is accessed by opening the cover on the Gauge Socket (inspection hatch). Warning: Observe procedures regarding access to the tank atmosphere.

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

13

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

1. Flat gasket. Yard supply. May differ in appearance. 2. Radar Tank Gauge GLA300. 3. M20 Hex Nut. 4. M20 Lock Washer. 5. M20x55 Hex Head Bolt. 6. Main cable. 7. Temperature connection cable. 9. Tank Socket.

Figure 6 Installation of Radar Tank Gauge GLA-300

2.6 How to replace a broken SPU 2.6.1 Upgrade Handler software The purposes of the GL-300 Upgrade Handler are to:

14

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

• • •

Enables the crew of the vessel to change a broken SPU (GLK-300) without the attendance of a service engineer from Kongsberg Maritime. Enables the crew to run upgrades of the GL-300 system and GL-300 Upgrade Handler by running a file compiled by Kongsberg Maritime without needing a service engineer from Kongsberg Maritime. Enables the crew to export a file containing the SPU configuration and abnormal reflection curves, and e-mail the file to the Kongsberg Maritime for further analysis. The abnormal reflection curves are reflection curves that are stored when SPU senses large deviations in the ullage.

TheGL-300 Upgrade Handler continuously reads the configuration files and abnormal reflection curves from the SPUs, the data are stored on the host PC. The primary task of the GL-300 Upgrade Handler is to be triggered when a SPU is changed with a spare unit. The program will then: 1. Change software of the new SPU in order to up/down-grade it to the same version as the previous one. 2. Write the configuration of the previous SPU down to the new SPU. 3. Make sure that the new SPU contains the same software and configuration as the previous.

The detailed procedure for this is described in the chapter Operational procedures. The GL-300 Upgrade Handler program will normally run on ROS 1 on KChief 500 system, however it may run on a stand-alone PC if no K-Chief ROS is present.

2.6.2 Upgrade Handler interface The GL-300 Upgrade Handler is available through the K-Chief 500 by:

1. Push ”Home” on the keyboard to get to the home menu. 2. Push ”Service” button on the screen. 3. Push ”GLK upgrade” button on the screen.

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

15

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

If no K-Chief 500 is available and the program is running on a standalone PC, the program has to be started from the startmenu. Features of the program when installed with the K-Chief 500: • An alarm will sound on theK-chief500 if the GL-300 Upgrade Handler stops running. Alarm tag: GLK300UpgradeHandler not running. • Program available through the K-Chief 500 user interface. • The program starts automatically when ROS 1 is started. • The program is only running on ROS 1, no redundancy on other ROSs are available.

2.6.3 Operational procedures This chapter describes the procedure which has to be performed when changing a broken SPU with a spare. The spare unit may be a part of the ship store, or requested from Kongsberg Maritime. The procedure is the same in both situations. Procedure when changing a broken SPU with a spare unit:

1. Locate broken SPU 2. Disconnect all connectors to the SPU 3. Remove the fan-box

16

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

Figure 7 The fan box

4. Take out broken SPU by using a screwdriver to lift the metal-clip.

Figure 8 How to loosen the SPU

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

17

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

5. Slide the SPU out of the rack, this will power down the SPU.

Figure 9 Sliding out the SPU 6. The spare unit has to be set to 00 on the address switches before power-up.

18

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

Figure 10 Address switches set to 00 7. Power up the spare unit by inserting it to the location of the previous SPU. The unit is powered up when inserted.

Figure 11 Inserting the SPU

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

19

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

8. The connector shall not be conneted at this stage. The address switches has to be set to 00 prior to inserting the unit. Factory settings will now be initiated. 9. Wait until all of the below indication is apparent: Status LED is blinking red and green. 10. Power down the spare SPU unit, by pressing the PWR switch. (Figure 14) (You can press the PWR switch by using a paper clip or a thin screw driver) 11. Change the address switches to the same as the broken SPU. It is very important that all SPU’s have unique address settings, (duplicate addresses will lead to system breakdown) 12. Before power-up verify that no other SPUs have the same address setting on the switches. 13. Connect all connectors in the same positions as on the broken SPU. 14. Power up the unit by pressing the PWR switch. (Figure 14) 15. The upgrade handler will now download required software and configuration.

Figure 12 Upgrade Handler message during updating

20

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

16. The upgrade handler will reboot the SPU when it is finished. 17. The procedure is finished when the status LED is green and no other LED are lit. 18. Mount the fan-box on-top of the SPU. 19. The serial number in the upgrade handler will now change to be the same as marked on the new SPU

Figure 13 The serial number

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

21

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

3 TROUBLESHOOTING Registered errors in the GL-300 are visualized by LED’s behind the front cover of the actual GLK-300.

Power switch

Switches

Status LEDs

Figure 14 GLK-300 front layout There are 5 different error categories:

22

•

SPU

•

ETH1

•

ETH2

•

HART

•

RADAR

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

SPU LED This LED indicates internal error in the SPU. Restart the GLK300 by pressing the PWR-button twice. If a restart doesn’t fix the problem, the GLK-300 needs to be replaced. ETH 1 LED or ETH 2 LED These LEDs indicate that there is no connection on the specified ethernet port. Troubleshooting is first done by restarting the GLK-300 (press the PWR-button twice). If this doesn’t help, check all wires and switches connecting the GLK-300 with the Operator Station. Cables may be interchanged on a switch to find out if the switch causes the problem. The switches often indicate connection by light symbols. If the error can not be related to a cable or switch, replace the GLK-300. HART LED This LED indicates error related to the Hart sensors connected to the GLK-300. First, try to restart the GLK-300 (press the PWR-button twice). If the error is still present, find out which sensors are connected to the GLK-300. Inspect the IAS to find out which of the sensors that have erratic values. If only some of the sensors have errors, the problem is probably related to the specific sensors or the cabling near the sensors. If all sensors have errors, the error may be in the GLK-300, the cable between GLK-300 and the GLA-300 (RTG), or the GLA-300 unit itself. For test, sensors may be interchanged with similar sensors connected to another GLK-300. If the error follows the GLK300 and not the sensors, replace the GLK-300 unit. Cables may be disconnected and checked for broken wires or short-circuits. Contact KM service department for further help.

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

23

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

RADAR LED This LED indicates error related to the GLA-300 unit. First, try to restart the GLK-300 (press the PWR-button twice). If the error is still present, disconnect the cable between GLK-300 and GLA-300 and check for broken wires or short-circuits. If cables seem OK, locate the defective unit by interchanging cables between two GLK-300’s (turn off the GLK-300’s before changing cables by pressing the PWR button once). If the RADAR LED continues to light on the same GLK-300, this is the defective unit that needs to be replaced. If the LED on the other GLK-300 used for testing lights up, the GLH-300 electronic unit inside the GLA-300 Radar Tank Gauge on deck is the defective unit that needs to be replaced. A description of how to change this unit is attached to the spare unit.

3.1 Power up the GLK’s after fault situation In the cabinet a sticker is placed informing you to have a delay for minimum 10 sec before switching on the power to the GLK300 units if any fault situation have made it necessary to power down the GLK’s. Its important that you follow this instruction

3.2 Fault and fault presentation There are several different faults that can be indicated on the GLK-300 and also presented in the K-Chief presentation program.

3.2.1 GLK-300 power failure All the GLK-300 LED’s are dark.

24

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

The following alarms will show in the alarm list in the bottom field of the K-Chief view.

3.2.2 Ethernet 1 broken The ETH 1 LED and the STATUS LED will be red.

The following alarm will show in the alarm list in the bottom field of the K-Chief view.

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

25

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

In addition, a system failure alarm will be indicated in the alarm page.

3.2.3 Ethernet 2 broken The ETH 2 LED and the STATUS LED will be red.

The following alarm will show in the alarm list in the bottom field of the K-Chief view.

In addition, a system failure alarm will be indicated in the alarm page.

26

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

3.2.4 Hart line between GLK and GLB broken The HART LED and the STATUS LED will be red

The following alarms will show in the alarm list in the bottom field of the K-Chief view. This is only the 4 latest alarms. In this situation 9 cargo alarms are provoked.

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

27

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

All the provoked alarms can be found in the alarm page.

3.2.5 GLB power failure When the GLB card has lost power, the RADAR LED and the STATUS LED will be red.

28

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

The following alarms will show in the alarm list in the bottom field of the K-Chief view. This is only the 4 latest alarms. In this situation 5 cargo alarms are provoked.

All the provoked alarms can be found in the alarm page

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

29

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

3.2.6 RS-485 between GLK and GLB broken When the RS-485 communication cable is broken the RADAR LED and the STATUS LED will be red.

30

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

The following alarms will show in the alarm list in the bottom field of the K-Chief view. This is only the 4 latest alarms. In this situation 5 cargo alarms are provoked.

All the provoked alarms can be found in the alarm page

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

31

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

3.2.7 Temperature sensor failure If one single temperature sensor fails, this will not be indicated on the GLK-300. The STATUS LED will be green.

32

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

The following alarms will show in the alarm list in the bottom field of the K-Chief view, indicating which temperature sensor that has failed.

In addition the alarms can be found in the alarm page.

3.2.8 GC-300 communication to GLK-300 broken When the communication to the GC-300 is broken all temperature sensor will have invalid values and show an alarm. The STATUS LED will be red.

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

33

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

The following alarms will show in the alarm list in the bottom field of the K-Chief view. This is only the 4 latest alarms. In this situation 7 cargo alarms are provoked.

In addition the alarms can be found in the alarm page.

34

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

3.2.9 Inert pressure failure The HART LED and the STATUS LED will be red

The following alarms will show in the alarm list in the bottom field of the K-Chief view.

There are two conditions for the CT01_IG sensor failure, but this is counted as one alarm. In addition the alarms can be found in the alarm page. Notice that only two alarms are listed, not 3.

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

35

GL-300 Tank Monitoring

36

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

User manual

4 FAQ

P-GL300/FE Rev. G

37

K-Gauge CLS 600 Operator Manual

385541/B November 2013

©

Kongsberg Maritime AS

Document history Document number: 385541 / Revision B Rev. A

August 2013

First version.

Rev. B

November 2013

Updated product name. Added MiscTanksListView

The reader This operator manual describes how to use the K-Gauge CLS 600 based on K-Chief 600. The operator should be experienced in the operation of alarm and monitoring systems and have basic knowledge of personal computers.

Note The information contained in this document remains the sole property of Kongsberg Maritime AS. No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means, and the information contained within it is not to be communicated to a third party, without the prior written consent of Kongsberg Maritime AS. Kongsberg Maritime AS endeavours to ensure that all information in this document is correct and fairly stated, but does not accept liability for any errors or omissions.

Warning The equipment to which this manual applies must only be used for the purpose for which it was designed. Improper use or maintenance may cause damage to the equipment and/or injury to personnel. The user must be familiar with the contents of the appropriate manuals before attempting to operate or work on the equipment. Kongsberg Maritime disclaims any responsibility for damage or injury caused by improper installation, use or maintenance of the equipment.

Comments To assist us in making improvements to the product and to this manual, we welcome comments and constructive criticism. e-mail: [email protected]

Kongsberg Maritime AS www.kongsberg.com

Operator Manual

Table of contents 1

INTRODUCTION............................................................... 5

2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................................... 6 System architecture ................................................................................................6 System functionality...............................................................................................7 Network ..................................................................................................................8 Power....................................................................................................................10 Integration and interfaces .....................................................................................10 Main building blocks............................................................................................12

3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12 3.13 3.14 3.15 3.16 3.17 3.18

USER INTERFACE........................................................... 15 Common Ship View .............................................................................................16 Cargo Tanks List View .........................................................................................21 Cargo Tanks Group View .....................................................................................23 Cargo Tanks Density View ...................................................................................28 Cargo Tanks Temperatures View..........................................................................31 Cargo Tanks Line Pressures View ........................................................................32 Cargo Tanks ETC View ........................................................................................34 Cargo High Level Alarm View.............................................................................36 Ballast Tanks List View........................................................................................38 Ballast Tanks Group View....................................................................................40 Ballast Tanks ETC View.......................................................................................43 Service Tanks List View .......................................................................................45 Service Tanks Group View ...................................................................................47 Misc. Tanks List View..........................................................................................50 Misc. Pressures View ...........................................................................................52 Misc. Temperatures View.....................................................................................54 Vapour Line Pressures View.................................................................................56 Stability from Load Calculator View ...................................................................59

4 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4

OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES ......................................... 60 Zero Adjustment of Inert Pressure sensor ............................................................61 Zero Adjustment of pressure sensor .....................................................................63 Density Adjustment ..............................................................................................65 Cargo Temperature Offset Adjustment.................................................................66

385541/B

3

K-Gauge CLS 600

4

385541/B

Introduction

1 Introduction

The purpose of this Operator Manual is to provide the descriptions and procedures required to allow for safe and efficient use of the K-Gauge CLS 600. A thorough understanding of system functions and controls is necessary to optimize overall performance. Careful study of the information in this manual is highly recommended, preferably while exploring the system’s various functions. System operation is a dynamic activity requiring regular adjustments and fine tuning to achieve the best possible results under varying environmental conditions. Note

The K-Gauge CLS 600 is a modular system, consisting of standard main units such as Operator Stations, Operator Panels and processing and I/O units. For a specific project configuration, the choice and quantities of items may vary and may depend on ship and class. Important

Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP and Windows 7 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Related documents → [338857] Kongsberg K-Chief 600 Operators Manual → [311956] Kongsberg K-Chief 600 Installation Manual → [346036] Merchant Marine Acronyms and abbreviations

385541/B

5

K-Gauge CLS 600

2 System description

2.1 System architecture The K-Gauge CLS 600 is based on the K-Chief 600 Marine Automation System platform. The K-Chief 600 system architecture has a modular design, and builds on Operator Stations and I/O modules interconnected by local data networks. This allows us to meet individual ship owner’s requirements using standard modules. Different selections of these units are used to configure each individual system. Figure 1

K-Chief 600 system architecture

The K-Chief 600 is decentralised for safety and ease of installation, but operation is centralised using the Operator Stations. Each I/O module has a specific role and is configured to match the operational requirements of the specific process area. Due to

6

385541/B

System description

this flexible architecture, the K-Chief 600 system can connect more I/O modules in the network at a later stage. This may be done to control additional process areas, or to extend the functionality.

2.2 System functionality Operator interaction The Operator Stations provide the operator with a number of standard display pictures. Control and detailed information of any of the Distributed Processing Units can be observed and performed from the Operator Stations. Sensor data can be presented as a bar graph or a trend curve. Selected sensor data may be printed automatically at fixed intervals if a printer is part of the system. The system can display the latest alarms for each alarm group individually or all active alarms. Whenever a variable or state changes significantly, the relevant Distributed Processing Unit updates the database in each of the Operator Stations. This means that data displayed at any Operator Station is always up to date. There is no need to request data each time the operator wishes to inspect a variable. As a result of this, the data traffic on the process bus and the Local Area Network is kept to a minimum, giving extremely fast data access. All changes in measuring points from the DPUs are logged and time stamped with precision of up to 1 millisecond. They are stored redundantly in all Operator Stations for the last seven days and can be displayed in trend views. A change is recorded each time a value oversteps the set deadband limit. Changes in measuring points are sampled with a rate of up to 100 samples pr. second. All digital process and alarm events are time stamped with precision up to 1 millisecond. Data are stored redundantly in all Operator Stations for 5 years. They can be displayed in the event history view.

385541/B

7

K-Gauge CLS 600

Access and control transfer Classification requirements state that equipment control must only be available from one location at any time. The K-Chief 600 access control transfer system allows organized control transfer from one location to another. By using the command buttons on the dedicated Operator Panel, access and control can be easily administrated. Request control is used to gain control of an alarm group. The Operator Station having control of this group, now receives a message requesting either to accept or deny the request. Another control function event is to override access. If an emergency situation occurs, it is possible to take control over an alarm group. In this case the process of accepting and denying is not needed. A password must however be given to get the wanted control. Operators must be logged on as Chief (Power user) to override access. Alarm and monitoring The alarm and monitoring system constitute the basic functionality of the K-Chief 600 marine automation system. The main purpose of the system is to give ship officers all the basic alarm and status information they require to maintain safe and efficient operation of the machinery and other related equipment. The logging printer and the colour graphics display records all status changes, such as alarm acknowledgements and alarm condition cleared. When all alarm conditions are cleared, the system returns to normal. Alarm limits and delays are adjustable by using the Operator Panel. A counter function keeps track of running hours for engines, pumps and related items. This function can also accumulate flow. Counter values are shown on the colour graphics display or may be printed. Some of the alarms are conditional and will be blocked when a specified condition is present. For instance, when the system is set in At Sea mode, all level alarms from ballast tanks are blocked. This function is started by defining a signal as an inhibit signal for a specified alarm or a specified group of alarms.

2.3 Network OS network The OS network is a redundant Local Area Network (LAN) employed for communication between the Operator Stations and the process area via Segment Controller Units (SCUs). Other PC based equipment (printers, switches) are also connected to the OS network. The LAN is an open net employing international standard protocols (Ethernet, TCP/IP) that permits connection and data exchange using Kongsberg Maritime standard interface programs.

8

385541/B

System description

Process network The process network is used for communication between the I/O units (Distributed Processing Units) in the process area. Segregation of the automation system is provided by setting up autonomous segments of local systems using a number of different Distributed Processing Units (DPUs). Such local systems can be valve control, pump control, power management, propulsion control, cargo control etc. The Segment Controller Unit (SCU) is used as the gateway to the OS for the various segments to which the DPUs are connected. A redundant Controller Area Network (CAN) bus is employed for communication between the DPUs in the process area. The CAN segments are compliant with the CANopen framework for maritime electronics (CiA® 307). Communication between the SCUs is employed either using the CANopen standard or using Ethernet Powerlink (EPL). Powerlink is a communication profile for Real-Time Ethernet (RTE). It extends Ethernet according to the IEEE 802.3 standard with mechanisms to transfer data with predictable timing and precise synchronisation. Serial lines Serial lines are used for communication from DPUs to third party systems. The type of serial line to be used in the system depends on the application, but the RS-422 and RS-485 standards are both commonly used, with a large number of different protocols. The Modbus TCP/IP interface can also be used. All network traffic is monitored from all Operator Stations. Statistics are displayed, and alarms are issued if network interfaces are not functioning.

385541/B

9

K-Gauge CLS 600

2.4 Power The K-Chief 600 system normally requires 230 VAC power supply for Operator Stations and 24 VDC power supply for Distributed Processing Units. Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS) can be used to protect Operator Stations and DPUs from problems associated with utility power, poor quality, or a complete loss of power. The UPS is then used to maintain a constant voltage, and if needed, isolate the output to the critical load. These actions help to keep power line problems from reaching the critical systems, where they can damage both hardware and software, causing the equipment to operate erratically. In a situation where the incoming main power is completely cut off, the energy stored in the UPS continue to provide power. A 30 minutes back-up is normally sufficient to keep the system operational until power is restored. This is also normally a requirement from the classification societies. All 24 VDC UPSes have earth fault detection, and any detected earth fault is given as a common alarm to the operator.

2.5 Integration and interfaces Modular design allows flexibility in configuring the system to individual requirements, covering the whole range from low complexity alarm systems to highly integrated alarm and monitoring systems with advanced process control. Sub-systems can include all or any combination of the following: • Alarm and monitoring system • Auxiliary control system • Power management system • Cargo control system • Propulsion control • Ballast automation system • Vessel performance system • HVAC (air conditioning) • Anti-heeling • Reefer monitoring • Fire system • Main Engine monitoring system The K-Chief 600 system can be used as a stand-alone system, but it may also be interfaced with other systems. The following list shows examples of systems. • K-Gauge – The K-Gauge is a cargo monitoring and control system which is a highly integrated system incorporating level gauging, temperature and pressure monitoring, valve and pump control.

10

385541/B

System description

• K-log – The K-Log Electronic Logbooks are designed to replace the traditional paper logbooks. K-Log supports event based recording of data related to navigation, engine watch, port calls and other operational activities. • Auto Chief C20® – The Auto Chief C20 is a propulsion control system which can be adapted to various engines. • Main Engine monitoring system – The ME monitoring system monitoring the conditions of Main Engine; Bearing Wear alarm handling, Cylinder Liner temperature and detections of scuffing of piston wall, main bearing temperature, cross-head bearing and crank bearing temperature, torque measurements, Water In Oil Detection. The Main Engine monitoring is under constant development to meet the modern requirements of such a system. • Ship@Web – The Ship@Web system enables continuous access to primary vessel data both on board the vessel and from ashore. • Voyage Data Recorder – The main purpose of our Voyage Data Recorder (VDR) the Maritime Black Box MBB® is to record and store relevant ship data and allow reconstruction of ship incidents at sea. • External VDR. • Serial interface to external systems – for instance a fire system or a level gauging system.

385541/B

11

K-Gauge CLS 600

2.6 Main building blocks Operator Stations The K-Chief 600 system can be operated through a number of Operator Stations installed in a number of different ways, for example in a standard Kongsberg Maritime console or as separate units for desktop operation. The standard K-Chief 600 Operator Station environment consists of the following main units: • A Windows™ based personal computer (PC) • One or two colour monitors for presentation of information • A Control Room Panel (CRP) - a K-Chief 600 specific operator panel • An optional Touch Screen Panel (TCP) • Other optional operator panels • Optional printers Computer (PC) The K-Chief 600 computer is an industrial small form factor PC. Due to its space-saving design, the size of the chassis is only two-thirds the size of an average desktop PC. The PC is type-approved by all major Classification Societies when it is installed in conjunction with our mariner kit for horizontal or vertical mounting. Monitors The colour monitor is used to display the operator images of the K-Chief 600 system. It uses thin film transistor (TFT) liquid crystal display (LCD) technology to ensure high image quality. The monitors are commercial off-the-shelf, but are all type-approved for maritime use. Monitors are available both in standard and in wide screen formats, with screen sizes ranging from 19” to 27”. The monitors can be delivered with kits for installation into a console, on the wall or for desktop mounting. Operator panels The Operator Panels are used to interact with the images on the Operator Station's colour monitor, hence controlling the processes. Such a process could be to display a new image or to act upon an element within an image. The layout of the buttons, lamps and controls on the Operator Panel is dependent on the panel type. The panels are designed for various methods of installation, but are primarily intended for mounting into a console.

12

385541/B

System description

Control Room Panel (CRP) The CRP is a specially designed operator panel for easy access and operation of the K-Chief 600 system. Operational processes are performed using the mechanical trackball and its associated buttons to point at and click symbols and menus on the colour monitor. The CRP is used in well-lit environments, and therefore has no background lightning. Printers Commercial laser printers or dot matrix printers can be supplied for printing of alarms and logs. Note that as the complete alarm history is stored by the K-Chief 600 system, a dedicated alarm printer is optional. Touch panel The Touch panel is a multipurpose operator panel designed to be placed in several locations on the ship. It is delivered with a 13” screen size. It allows alarm indication, process control and power management. Operation is performed on a high resolution colour graphical touch display. For small segregated alarm systems it can be the only operator panel. The Touch panel contains a symbol library for presentation of process control equipment and it uses these to display process diagrams. The Touch panel gives the operator the possibility to: • Monitor the status of any object, from a single input signal to a controllable object • Be informed of any process- or system alarm, through visual and audible signals • Control processes using the touch screen and graphical feedback Distributed Processing Units provides several models of Distributed Processing Units (DPU) to handle different types of I/O and applications. Each Distributed Processing Unit type has a specific capacity in number and type of analogue or digital input and output (I/O) channels.

385541/B

13

K-Gauge CLS 600

To configure the tasks for a specific Distributed Processing Unit, parameters are loaded into the unit. This allows it to perform alarm functions, control functions, safety or any combination of these, and makes it easy to separate system functions. When an unacceptable condition is detected, they generate an alarm signal, identify the responsible sensor, and provide information about the condition. All Distributed Processing Unit types have been qualified according to the latest revision of the IACS E10 test procedure, satisfying the requirements for placement in the most demanding locations. All Distributed Processing Units can be mounted directly on diesel engines or similar locations without shock absorbers. Only Ingress Protection (IP) may be needed. The Distributed Processing Units are CE marked as required for some European Union flagstate vessels. They also meet the requirements to use the “Wheel Mark” defined by the European Union Maritime Directive (EMD), satisfying all the new Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements.

14

385541/B

User Interface

3 User Interface

This chapter gives an overview of the K-Gauge CLS 600‘s graphical user interface, including its features, requirements and options. General operation of K-Chief 600 is described in detail in Operators Manual for K-Chief 600 (doc. 338857). Topics • Common Ship View on page 16 • Cargo Tanks List View on page 21 • Cargo Tanks Group View on page 23 • Cargo Tanks Density View on page 28 • Cargo Tanks Temperatures View on page 31 • Cargo High Level Alarm View on page 36 • Cargo Tanks Line Pressures View on page 32 • Cargo Tanks ETC View on page 34 • Cargo High Level Alarm View on page 36 • Ballast Tanks List View on page 38 • Ballast Tanks Group View on page 40 • Ballast Tanks ETC View on page 43 • Service Tanks List View on page 45 • Service Tanks Group View on page 47 • Misc. Pressures View on page 52 • Misc. Temperatures View on page 54 • Vapour Line Pressures View on page 56 • Stability from Load Calculator View on page 59 •

on page

385541/B

15

K-Gauge CLS 600

3.1 Common Ship View In top of all tank mimics there are shown common ship data like Trim, List, Layoutof tanks, Draft and Atmospheric pressure Trim/List Trim and list are shown on left side at top of every tank list view or tank group view.

With privilege of Chief it is possible to set a fixed value of trim and list. A fixed value is shown with blue background. By a mouse click on the value field of either trim or list, a dialog appear where the value can be inserted.

For trim or list simply select “Fixed” in dropdown menu and then click on the value field (within the four corners surrounding the value). Trim fixed value or List fixed value dialog appear where the values can be inserted.

16

385541/B

User Interface

Tank layout Tank layout shows placement of tanks when Cargo, Ballast, Service or Misc tanks view is selected.

Draft Draft view supports different configuration of draft sensors. Only draft sensors that are present and configured will be shown.

By a mouse click on value field for each draft sensor, a small dialog will be displayed.

385541/B

17

K-Gauge CLS 600

Then by clicking on chevron button a new window appears with five panes: Summary, Trend, Alarm parameters, Parameters and IO tags

18

385541/B

User Interface

385541/B

19

K-Gauge CLS 600

In bottom right corner of Draft view, the value of sea water density is shown (if part of configuration for this vessel) used for calculation of draft values. With privilege of Chief it is possible to set a fixed value of sea water density. A fixed value is shown with blue background. By a mouse click on the value field , a Sea water density dialog appear where the value can be inserted.

Atmospheric pressure Atmospheric pressure is shown on top right side on tank mimics. With privilege of Chief it is possible to set a fixed value for the atmospheric pressure. A fixed value is shown with blue background. By a mouse click on the value field for atmospheric pressure, a dialog appear where the value can be inserted.

Simply select Fixed in dropdown menu and then click on the value field where the values may be inserted.

20

385541/B

User Interface

3.2 Cargo Tanks List View Purpose This view show all values and data for one cargo tank in one line. It is possible to edit Tank Content, Content Type and Inert Pressure Sensor Offset if the corresponding optional

column is activated. View options The Options button is used to customize which optional columns to be displayed or hidden. Two options are available: • Optional columns: Select or deselect singular columns using the check boxes (actual columns selectable being dependent on the active view) • Restore default layout: Restore to factory settings by clicking on Default button

Context menu The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The following items can be selected: • View history This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply, then right-clicking the object is disabled. • Send to trend This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views. • Send to custom view This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views. • Select all

385541/B

21

K-Gauge CLS 600

With Chief privileges this option appears and it is possible to select all rows and edit all tags in a column simultaneously. • Edit selected Selected tag(s) may be edited

22

385541/B

User Interface

3.3 Cargo Tanks Group View Purpose The purpose of Cargo Tank Group View is to give more graphical and complete information about the tanks in scope of attention. The user can make its own tank groups with all necessary information available. Default Cargo Tank Group View shows all tanks.

Group Dialog To create a new custom cargo tank group, just click the plus sign to the right of the Overview tab. A new group appear in an empty tab called New group. To edit this new group click on Group manager.

385541/B

23

K-Gauge CLS 600

Group manager In Group manager it is possible to • give the group a name • add tanks to the group by marking the check box • describe tank content for each tank • give each tank an individual colour • or give all tanks same colour

24

385541/B

User Interface

385541/B

25

K-Gauge CLS 600

Optional rows Some of the rows beneath the bargraphs are optional. The operator choose what process value to display. Context menu The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The following items can be selected: • View history This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply, then right-clicking the object is disabled. • Send to trend This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views. • Send to custom view

26

385541/B

User Interface

This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views.

385541/B

27

K-Gauge CLS 600

3.4 Cargo Tanks Density View Purpose The purpose of this view is to show density of cargo for each cargo tank on one line. Content Type • Content type may be set from either Cargo Tank View or from Cargo Density View. By a left click on a Content Type cell, a dialog will appear where the operator can choose correct content for this tank. Density calculation method is linked to Content Type.

28

385541/B

User Interface

View options The Options button is used to customize which optional column to be displayed or hidden. Two options are available: • Optional columns: Select or deselect singular columns using the check boxes (actual columns selectable being dependent on the active view) • Restore default layout: Restore to factory settings by clicking on Default button

Context menu The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The following items can be selected: • View history This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply, then right-clicking the object is disabled. • Send to trend This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views. • Send to custom view This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views. • Select all With Chief privileges this option appears and it is possible to select all rows and edit all tags in a column simultaneously.

385541/B

29

K-Gauge CLS 600

• Edit selected Selected tag(s) may be edited

30

385541/B

User Interface

3.5 Cargo Tanks Temperatures View Purpose The purpose for Cargo Temperature View is to show all measured and calculated temperatures for one tank in one line. Submerged temperature sensors are shown with an “In Liquid” symbol

Context menu The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The following items can be selected: • View history This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply, then right-clicking the object is disabled. • Send to trend This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views. • Send to custom view This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views.

385541/B

31

K-Gauge CLS 600

3.6 Cargo Tanks Line Pressures View Purpose The purpose for Cargo Lines View is to show all measured and calculated values for cargo lines. View options The Options button is used to customize which optional columns to be displayed or hidden. Two options are available: • Optional columns: Select or deselect singular columns using the check boxes (actual columns selectable being dependent on the active view) • Restore default layout: Restore to factory settings by clicking on Default button

Context menu The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The following items can be selected: • View history This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply, then right-clicking the object is disabled. • Send to trend This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views. • Send to custom view This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views. • Select all

32

385541/B

User Interface

With Chief privileges this option appears and it is possible to select all rows and edit all tags in a column simultaneously.

385541/B

33

K-Gauge CLS 600

3.7 Cargo Tanks ETC View Purpose The purpose for Cargo Tank ETC View is to show Estimated Time to Completion (ETC) of loading or discharging of tanks involved with current flow rate (volume or weight rate). Target value of loading/discharging To calculate the time to finish of loading/discharging it is needed a target volume. With Chief privileges it is possible to insert/change value of Target volume high for loading cargo by selecting a cell or the whole column. Likewise for Target volume low when

discharging cargo.

View options The Options button is used to customize which optional columns to be displayed or hidden. Two options are available: • Optional columns: Select or deselect singular columns using the check boxes (actual columns selectable being dependent on the active view) • Restore default layout: Restore to factory settings by clicking on Default button

34

385541/B

User Interface

Context menu The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The following items can be selected: • View history This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply, then right-clicking the object is disabled. • Send to trend This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views. • Send to custom view This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views. • Select all With Chief privileges this option appears and it is possible to select all rows and edit all tags in a column simultaneously.

385541/B

35

K-Gauge CLS 600

3.8 Cargo High Level Alarm View Purpose The purpose for Cargo High Level Alarm View is to show state of the High Level Alarm system. • High Level Alarm: 95 % of tank volume. • Overfill Alarm: 98 % of tank volume.

Alarm When an alarm occur the colour of the diode connected to the tank and alarm limit changes to red. In addition the external horn and rotation light is switched on. Silence off external horn and rotating light Dedicated horn and rotating light for the high level alarm system can be silenced by using the Silence button located at the top bar. Alarm Blocking and Seagoing mode Each alarm can be blocked individually by using the Block button. A blocked alarm is identified by a blue background colour. When the vessel is set in seagoing mode, all alarms are blocked. To be able to set the vessel in this mode you need to be logged on as Chief.

36

385541/B

User Interface

Context menu The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The following items can be selected: • View history This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply, then right-clicking the object is disabled. • Send to trend This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views. • Send to custom view This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views. • Select all With Chief privileges this option appears and it is possible to select all rows and edit all tags in a column simultaneously.

385541/B

37

K-Gauge CLS 600

3.9 Ballast Tanks List View Purpose The purpose of Ballast Tanks View is to show measured and calculated values for all ballast tanks.

View options The Options button is used to customize which optional columns to be displayed or hidden. Two options are available: • Optional columns: Select or deselect singular columns using the check boxes (actual columns selectable being dependent on the active view) • Restore default layout: Restore to factory settings by clicking on Default button

38

385541/B

User Interface

Context menu The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The following items can be selected: • View history This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply, then right-clicking the object is disabled. • Send to trend This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views. • Send to custom view This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views. • Select all With Chief privileges this option appears and it is possible to select all rows and edit all tags in column simultaneously. • Edit selected Selected tag(s) may be edited

385541/B

39

K-Gauge CLS 600

3.10 Ballast Tanks Group View Purpose The purpose of Ballast Tanks Group View is to give more graphical and complete information about the ballast tanks in scope of attention. The user can make its own tank groups with all necessary information available. Default Ballast Tanks Group View show all tanks.

Group Dialog To create a new custom ballast tank group, just click the plus sign to the right of the Overview tab. A new group appear in an empty tab called New group. To edit this new group click on Group manager Group manager In “Group manager” it is possible to • give the group a name • add tanks to the group by marking the check box • describe tank content for each tank • give each tank an individual colour or • give all tanks same colour

40

385541/B

User Interface

The configured content and colour in the new group can be seen in the group view:

Context menu The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The following items can be selected: • View history

385541/B

41

K-Gauge CLS 600

This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply, then right-clicking the object is disabled. • Send to trend This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views. • Send to custom view This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views.

42

385541/B

User Interface

3.11 Ballast Tanks ETC View Purpose The purpose for Ballast Tank ETC View is to show Estimated Time to Completion (ETC) of loading or discharging of tanks involved with current flow rate (volume or weight rate). Target value of loading/discharging To calculate the time to finish of loading/discharging it is needed a target volume. With Chief privileges it is possible to insert/change value of Target volume high for filling of ballast water by selecting a cell or the whole column. Likewise for Target volume low

when emptying of ballast water.

View options The Options button is used to customize which optional columns to be displayed or hidden. Two options are available: • Optional columns: Select or deselect singular columns using the check boxes (actual columns selectable being dependent on the active view) • Restore default layout: Restore to factory settings by clicking on Default button

385541/B

43

K-Gauge CLS 600

Context menu The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The following items can be selected: • View history This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply, then right-clicking the object is disabled. • Send to trend This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views. • Send to custom view This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views. • Select all With Chief privileges this option appears and it is possible to select all rows and edit all tags in a column simultaneously.

44

385541/B

User Interface

3.12 Service Tanks List View Purpose The purpose of Service Tank View is to show all measured and calculated values for all service tanks.

View options The Options button is used to customize which optional columns to be displayed or hidden. Two options are available: • Optional columns: Select or deselect singular columns using the check boxes (actual columns selectable being dependent on the active view) • Restore default layout: Restore to factory settings by clicking on Default button

385541/B

45

K-Gauge CLS 600

Context menu The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The following items can be selected: • View history This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply, then right-clicking the object is disabled. • Send to trend This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views. • Send to custom view This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views. • Select all With Chief privileges this option appears and it is possible to select all rows and edit all tags in a column simultaneously. • Edit selected Selected tag(s) may be edited

46

385541/B

User Interface

3.13 Service Tanks Group View Purpose The purpose of Service Tank Group view is to give more graphical and complete information about the service tanks in scope of attention. The user can make its own tank groups with all necessary information available. Default service Tank Group View show all tanks.

Group Dialog To create a new custom ballast tank group, just click the plus sign to the right of the Overview tab. A new group appear in an empty tab called New group. To edit this new group click on Group manager Group manager In “Group manager” it is possible to • give the group a name • add tanks to the group by marking the check box • describe tank content for each tank • give each tank an individual colour or • give all tanks same colour

385541/B

47

K-Gauge CLS 600

The configured content and colour in the new group can be seen in the group view

48

385541/B

User Interface

Context menu The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The following items can be selected: • View history This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply, then right-clicking the object is disabled. • Send to trend This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views. • Send to custom view This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views.

385541/B

49

K-Gauge CLS 600

3.14 Misc. Tanks List View Purpose The purpose of the Misc. Tanks List View is to show all measured and calculated values for all misc. tanks.

View options The Options button is used to customize which optional columns to be displayed or hidden. Two options are available: • Optional columns: Select or deselect singular columns using the check boxes (actual columns selectable being dependent on the active view) • Restore default layout: Restore to factory settings by clicking on Default button

50

385541/B

User Interface

Context menu The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The following items can be selected: • View history This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply, then right-clicking the object is disabled. • Send to trend This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views. • Send to custom view This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views. • Select all With Chief privileges this option appears and it is possible to select all rows and edit all tags in a column simultaneously. • Edit selected Selected tag(s) may be edited

385541/B

51

K-Gauge CLS 600

3.15 Misc. Pressures View Purpose The purpose of Misc. Pressures View is to show all miscellaneous pressures in the system that do not fall into a category shown by any other view.

View options The Options button is used to customize which optional columns to be displayed or hidden. Two options are available: • Optional columns: Select or deselect singular columns using the check boxes (actual columns selectable being dependent on the active view) • Restore default layout: Restore to factory settings by clicking on Default button

52

385541/B

User Interface

Context menu The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The following items can be selected: • View history This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply, then right-clicking the object is disabled. • Send to trend This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views. • Send to custom view This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views. • Select all With Chief privileges this option appears and it is possible to select all rows and edit all tags in a column simultaneously.

385541/B

53

K-Gauge CLS 600

3.16 Misc. Temperatures View Purpose The purpose of Misc. Temperatures View is to show all measured that do not fall into a category shown by any other view.

View options The Options button is used to customize which optional columns to be displayed or hidden. Two options are available: • Optional columns: Select or deselect singular columns using the check boxes (actual columns selectable being dependent on the active view) • Restore default layout: Restore to factory settings by clicking on Default button

54

385541/B

User Interface

Context menu The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The following items can be selected: • View history This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply, then right-clicking the object is disabled. • Send to trend This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views. • Send to custom view This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views. • Select all With Chief privileges this option appears and it is possible to select all rows and edit all tags in a column simultaneously.

385541/B

55

K-Gauge CLS 600

3.17 Vapour Line Pressures View Purpose The purpose of Vapour Line Pressures View is to give the operator an overview of usage of the vapour lines on the vessel. It is a completely manual configurabel view done by the operator. Each vapour line on the vessel can be given a separate colour. When a tank is connected to this vapour line, the tank in ship layout will have a frame with this colour.

To configure a vapour line, do as follow: 1

Select a colour for the vapour line to configure by double click on the laying bargraph.

2

Add tanks to be connected to this vapour line by clicking on Select tanks button in column Select tank for vapour line. Mark the check box for the tanks wanted to be connected to this vapour line.

56

385541/B

User Interface

Note

It is not possible to select a tank connected to another vapour line

3

In Ship layout it is now possible to see which tank that is connected to this vapour line. It is indicated with a frame on the tank with same colour as the laying bargraph has for the vapour line.

Three vapour lines connected to respectively CT01, CT05 and CT08. Note

To achive a view that gives best information it might be a good practice to give different colour to different cargo

View options The Options button is used to customize which optional columns to be displayed or hidden. Two options are available: • Optional columns: Select or deselect singular columns using the check boxes (actual columns selectable being dependent on the active view) • Restore default layout: Restore to factory settings by clicking on Default button

385541/B

57

K-Gauge CLS 600

Context menu The context menu is available by right-clicking on any tag in a cell, row or column. The following items can be selected: • View history This opens the Alarm history view, showing the history of all alarms for the selected tag. The selected tag is filtered by tag name. If the relevant item does not apply, then right-clicking the object is disabled. • Send to trend This allows the tag to be added to one of the Trend views. • Send to custom view This allows the tag to be added to one of the Custom views. • Select all With Chief privileges this option appears and it is possible to select all rows and edit all tags in a column simultaneously.

58

385541/B

User Interface

3.18 Stability from Load Calculator View Purpose The purpose of the Loading Calculator view is to show stability data from the Loading Calculator in a K-Chief 600 Operator Station. With this view it is possible to see the vessels over all bending moment, shear force and stability. The operator don’t need to move to the Loading Calculator computer to see the ship’s stability during loading/discharging.

385541/B

59

K-Gauge CLS 600

4 Operational Procedures

Topics • Zero Adjustment of Inert Pressure sensor on page 61 • Zero Adjustment of pressure sensor on page 63 • Density Adjustment on page 65 • Cargo Temperature Offset Adjustment on page 66

60

385541/B

Operational Procedures

4.1 Zero Adjustment of Inert Pressure sensor The inert pressure sensor on cargo tanks can be zero adjusted in SW within a limited band by subtracting the atmosphere pressure when the tank is opened. Important

Prior to this zero adjustment algorithm the cargo tank must be ventilated to achieve the same pressure as the surrounding atmosphere pressure

1

Open CargoTankListView in K-Chief 600

2

Log on with Chief privileges or higher to be able to edit offset. (if Inert press. offset column is not visible click on Option, then Optional columnsand select Inert pres. offset.)

3

Click on offset cell and a dialog appears.

4

Click on Resetto remove any old sensor offset.

385541/B

61

K-Gauge CLS 600

5

Click on Set to zero adjust the sensor and then the procedure is finished.

Note

If a new sensor is installed the old zeroing offset value must be removed. This is done by running this zeroing algorithm including to pt. 4

62

385541/B

Operational Procedures

4.2 Zero Adjustment of pressure sensor When KM pressure sensors are used the sensors can be zero adjusted in SW within a limited band. This can be done by double clicking on the value in the Pressure sensor (mWC) column in the tank list view. If the column is not visible press the Options button and Optional Columns to select which columns to be displayed. If the deviation is within the legal range a dialog box will appear:

Select Start Zeroing to adjust the sensor. Confirm the operation after ensuring the displayed conditions are met.

When the zeroing is done the adjusted value is displayed.

385541/B

63

K-Gauge CLS 600

Note

If a new sensor is installed the zeroing must be removed. This is done by selecting the reset sensor button on the operator dialog displayed. Note

If the Tank Sounding System is delivered together with C-Loading loading computer, zero adjusted pressure value may be sent from the Tank Sounding System to the loading computer for calculation on level.

64

385541/B

Operational Procedures

4.3 Density Adjustment With privilege of Chief it is possible to set density of tank content. By a mouse click on value field of density for a the tank, a dialog appear where the value can be inserted.

For service tanks the density at 15 ºC should be inserted, in addition the actual temperature of the content can be inserted to calculate the actual density of the tank content.

Note

If the Tank Sounding System is delivered together with C-Loading loading computer, density may be sent from the Tank Sounding System to the loading computer.

385541/B

65

K-Gauge CLS 600

4.4 Cargo Temperature Offset Adjustment With privilege of Chief it is possible to set an offset value on cargo temperature sensor. 1

Open CargoTemperatureView in K-Chief 600

2

Log on with Chief privileges or higher to be able to edit offset. (if temperature sensor offset column is not visible click on Option, then Optional columnsand select the offset for the wanted temperature sensor). (if Inert press. offset column is not visible click on Option and Optional columns view this column.

3

Click on offset cell, enter offset value and click OK in dialog that appears.

Note

If a new temperature sensor is installed the old offset value (if any) must be removed.

66

385541/B

K-Gauge CLS 600

67

385541/B

©2013

Kongsberg Maritime

Installation manual

Installation Manual GL-300 Tank Monitoring

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

1

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

Revisions

Rev. A B C D E

Written by Date 2009-04-15 2009-06-28 2009-11-02 2010-03-24 2010-12-15

Checked by Date 2009-04-16 2009-06-29 2009-11-12 2010-03-24 2010-12-15

Sign. KSI KSI BMF BMF BMF

Sign. BMF BMF HJH HJH AAS

Approved by Date 2009-04-17 2009-06-29 2009-11-12 2010-03-24 2010-12-15

Sign. BHJ BHJ KSI BHJ BHJ

Document history

Rev. A Rev. B Rev.C Rev.D Rev.E

First edition Updated figures Updated figures Added slop tank solution and minor text corrections according to comments. Request information sheet removed and established as own document. Added Horn solution for bitumen tanks and updated figures.

The information contained in this document is subject to change without prior notice. Kongsberg Maritime AS shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this document. © 2010 Kongsberg Maritime AS. All rights reserved. No part of this work covered by the copyright hereon may be reproduced or otherwise copied without prior permission from Kongsberg Maritime AS.

Kongsberg Maritime AS NO-7005 Trondheim Norway

2

Phone: +47 73 58 10 00 Fax: +47 73 58 10 01 www.kongsberg.com E-mail: [email protected]

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

Table of contents 1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................... 7 1.1 About the manual ................................................................................................... 7 1.2 The reader ............................................................................................................... 7 1.3 Purpose ................................................................................................................... 7 1.4 Reference documentation ....................................................................................... 8 2 ABOUT TANK MONITORING ............................................................................ 9 2.1 KONGSBERG Tank Monitoring ........................................................................... 9 2.2 Topology diagram for GL-300 Tank Monitoring ................................................. 11 2.3 Applications .......................................................................................................... 12 3 STORAGE, TRANSPORTATION AND UNPACKING ................................... 13 3.1 Storage .................................................................................................................. 13 3.2 Transportation ....................................................................................................... 13 3.3 Unpacking, dismantling ........................................................................................ 13 4 PROJECTING AND SYSTEM DELIVERY ...................................................... 14 4.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................... 14 4.2 Projecting schedule ............................................................................................... 14 5 LOCATION OF THE RADAR TANK GAUGE ................................................ 15 5.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................... 15 5.1.1

Locating the Radar Tank Gauge ............................................................... 15

5.1.2 Reflections from obstacles........................................................................ 15 5.2 Free-space requirements and methods to reduce the influence of obstructions ... 16 5.2.1

Methods to reduce the influence of obstructions ...................................... 17

5.2.2

Corner reflectors ....................................................................................... 18

5.2.3

Longitudinal frames in the primary cone ................................................. 20

5.2.4

Radar Tank Gauge close to bulkhead ....................................................... 21

5.2.5

Platforms, staircases and horizontal girders ............................................. 26

5.2.6

Heating coils in antenna zone ................................................................... 27

5.2.7

Cargo inlet ................................................................................................ 28

5.2.8

Inert gas inlet ............................................................................................ 29

5.2.9

Still pipes .................................................................................................. 29

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

3

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

6 THE RADAR TANK GAUGE ON THE GAUGE SOCKET ............................ 31 6.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................... 31 6.2 The radar tank gauge GLA-300 ............................................................................ 31 6.3 The Radar Tank Gauge on Gauge Sockets ........................................................... 32 6.3.1

The RTG mounted on a Ø200 mm Gauge Socket .................................... 32

6.3.2

The RTG mounted on a Ø500 mm Gauge Socket (optional) ................... 33

6.3.3

Optional Manual sounding plug ............................................................... 33

6.3.4

Radar house with variant nipples ............................................................. 33

6.3.5

RTG still pipe solution for slop tank ........................................................ 34

6.3.6

RTG cables installed into cable protection pipes ..................................... 38

6.3.7

RTG installation with flexible hose on cable ........................................... 39

6.3.8

Connection of optional jet nozzle ............................................................. 39

6.3.9

Cleaning nozzle on stand pipe installation ............................................... 41

6.3.10

Installation of pipe adapter for 4.0’ pipes ................................................. 42

7 CONNECTION OF OTHER SENSORS ............................................................. 44 7.1 General.................................................................................................................. 44 7.2 Atmospheric pressure transmitter or draft pressure transmitters .......................... 44 8 CABLING ............................................................................................................... 45 8.1 General.................................................................................................................. 45 8.2 Cable specifications .............................................................................................. 45 8.3 Connections – overview ....................................................................................... 46 9 INSTALLATION OF THE GLA-300 RADAR TANK GAUGE ...................... 47 9.1 Radar Tank Gauge installation on gauge socket .................................................. 47 9.2 Radar Tanks Gauge on angular gauge socket ....................................................... 48 9.3 Physical description of Gauge Socket for Radar Tank Gauge ............................. 48 9.3.1 Mounting and welding of Gauge Socket for Radar Tank Gauge ............. 49 9.4 Radar Tank Gauge dimensions ............................................................................. 53 9.5 Installation of the Radar Tank Gauge ................................................................... 54

10 10.1

4

9.5.1

Installation of Radar Tank Gauge............................................................. 54

9.5.2

Installation description ............................................................................. 56

9.5.3

Cable entry and connection ...................................................................... 56

INSTALLATION OF THE GC-300 CARGO TEMPERATURE UNIT ...... 60 System layout of GC-300 tank installation .......................................................... 61

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

10.2

Physical description of separate parts ................................................................... 61 10.2.1

GC-300 Cargo Temperature Unit for maximum 3 temperature sensors .. 61

10.2.2

UP-1052 adapter ....................................................................................... 63

10.2.3 MN1535 temperature sensor .................................................................... 64 10.3 Installation of GC-300 on UP-1052/353167 adapter............................................ 65 10.4 Installation of GC-300 on a FRAMO Tank Pump installation............................. 67 10.5 Installation of MN1535 temperature sensors........................................................ 68 10.6 Connection of MN1535 temperature sensors ....................................................... 70 10.7 GC-300 installation with flexible hose ................................................................. 71 10.8 GC-300 cable preparation..................................................................................... 72 11 APPENDIX 1 ...................................................................................................... 74 Extract of “Standards 60533 0 1 EC:1999(E) – Measures to achieve EMC” ................. 74

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

5

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

ABBREVIATIONS

6

CG:

Centre of gravity of the tank.

CL:

Centre Line.

CTU:

Cargo Temperature Unit.

GC-300:

Cargo Temperature Unit (CTU).

GL0:

Zero ullage reference point for the radar.

GLA-300:

Radar Tank Gauge (RTG).

GLK-300:

Signal Processing Unit (SPU).

GS:

Gauge Socket.

Hb:

Height of the tank.

Hr:

Ullage reference.

La:

Longitudinal distance to CG.

Lb:

Longitudinal distance to MP.

Lr:

Level reference.

MP:

Manual point (also called the manual dip point).

RTG:

Radar Tank Gauge.

SPU:

Signal Processing Unit.

Ta:

Transversal distance to CG.

Tb:

Transversal distance to MP.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

1 INTRODUCTION 1.1 About the manual The intention with this manual is to provide necessary information for planning and installation of the GL-300 Tank Monitoring, for oil, product and chemical tankers. The manual is meant to give the reader a good understanding of important matters in connection with engineering prior to the installation as well as direct installation instructions. GL-300 request Information sheet [6] must be filled in and returned to Kongsberg Maritime. The number of pages you will need to complete and return to Kongsberg Maritime will depend on the actual installation and configuration of the system. For further information on system functions, refer to the Product Description, for K-Gauge CLS Tank Monitoring [1]. For inquires and technical assistance, please contact Kongsberg Maritime, Trondheim, Norway.

1.2 The reader This manual is meant for designers and technical personnel at shipyards or companies who are responsible for the installation of GL-300 Tank Monitoring.

1.3 Purpose The installation manual gives guidelines to location and describes how to do the mechanical and electrical installation of the GLA-300 Radar Tank Gauge (RTG) and the GC-300 Cargo Temperature Unit (CTU) on open deck for oil, product and chemical tankers.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

7

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

1.4 Reference documentation In addition to this manual, the documentation for KONGSBERG Tank Monitoring consists mainly of the following manuals: [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]

8

Product Description, K-Gauge CLS User’s Manual, K-Chief500 User’s Manual, GL-300 Picture installation guide GL-300 Commissioning Manual GL-300 GL-300 Request Information Sheet

P-KG_GL300/BE P-KGCLS-GL300/FE P-GL300/FE P-GL300/DM P-GL300/EE P-GL300REQINF

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

2 ABOUT TANK MONITORING 2.1 KONGSBERG Tank Monitoring GL-300 Tank Monitoring uses well established radar principles to provide accurate level measurements. An inert gas pressure transmitter is integrated in the Radar Tank Gauge, which also acts as a connection box for the Cargo Temperature Unit. The CTU shares the communication cable with the RTG. Advanced signal processing ensures accuracy and reliability. GL-300 Tank Monitoring mainly consists of: • The Radar Tank Gauge GLA-300 (RTG). • The Cargo Temperature Unit GC-300 (CTU). • The Signal Processing Unit GLK-300 (SPU). Each tank is equipped with one RTG and one CTU in hazardous area connected to the SPU in safe area. GL-300 Tank Monitoring consists of up to 60 SPU’s. The RTG GLA-300/P

The Radar Tank Gauge (RTG) consists of an offset parabolic antenna with a 24 GHz microwave transmitter/receiver and interface to the SPU. The RTG is fitted to a Gauge Socket and mounted on top of the tank, thus leaving no parts of the system in physical contact with the tank content. An inert gas pressure transmitter is integrated in the RTG.

The RTG GLA-300/H

A variant of the Radar Tank Gauge (RTG), GLA-300/H horn antenna is available. This is used for measurement in clean solutions, and when a still pipe is required to avoid obstructions in the tank. The horn antenna is available with a 24 GHz or a 10 GHz microwave unit.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

9

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

The CTU GC-300

The Cargo Temperature Unit (CTU) consists of a transmitter that can interface up to three PT-1000 temperature sensors MN1535. This unit is connected to the RTG and uses the same cable as the RTG between hazardous and safe area.

The SPU GLK-300

The Signal Processing Unit located in the system cabinet, consists of the following: • Zener barriers, providing power to the RTG, digital interface handling measuring signal from the RTG and HART communication for inert gas pressure and cargo temperature signals. • Dual high speed Ethernet communication to the Remote Operator Station (ROS).

10

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

GL-300 topology (example with 14 cargo tanks) 11

2.2 Topology diagram for GL-300 Tank Monitoring

Figure 1. P-GL300/DE Rev. E

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

2.3 Applications GL-300 Tank Monitoring is primarily intended to measure the ullage, inert gas pressure and temperature in tanks onboard ships, offshore and in industry. The standard version can measure on most liquid, e.g. petroleum products, acids, solvents etc. up to a distance of 50 metres. The measurements can be made under extreme environmental conditions with respect to temperature, pressure and humidity.

12

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

3 STORAGE, TRANSPORTATION AND UNPACKING 3.1 Storage The equipment must be stored in a dry place before installation. Note

To avoid any damage caused by non-proper storing, the requirements must be followed. The guarantee will otherwise not be valid!

3.2 Transportation Heavy equipment should always be transported to the place where they shall be mounted in their original transport packages, in order to protect it from damage during transportation. This concerns specially the use of trucks and cranes. Note

If any damage rises because of failure in taking these precautions, the guarantee will not be valid!

3.3 Unpacking, dismantling When unpacking the equipment, please observe any unpacking instructions printed on the boxes. Special precautions must be taken to avoid any damage to the equipment by means of tools and unpacking equipment.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

13

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

4 PROJECTING AND SYSTEM DELIVERY 4.1 Introduction All information that is required by Kongsberg Maritime must be supplied in due time according to the project schedule. It is important that the "Requested Information pages” [6], are filled in properly and returned to Kongsberg Maritime within the given deadline. Note

Drawings showing the shipyards proposed positioning and drawings showing any obstacle that might affect the radar beam must be sent to Kongsberg Maritime for review in due time before installation of Gauge Sockets (preferably when the system is ordered), latest 120 days before installation.

4.2 Projecting schedule To ensure an efficient work schedule of the planning, installation and commissioning of the system, the following guidelines apply:

14

1

Order confirmation will be sent to customer.

2

Based on Purchase Order and specification, approval documentation will be sent to the customer.

3

Comments to approval documentation and Requested Information Pages are to be returned to Kongsberg Maritime at least 120 days weeks before delivery.

4

The system will be manufactured, tested and delivered together with documentation.

5

The customer will carry out all installations according to the documentation.

6

Customer send request to Kongsberg Maritime for a service engineer at least two (2) weeks before commissioning.

7

Kongsberg Maritime carries out the final inspection and commissioning.

8

System handover.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

5 LOCATION OF THE RADAR TANK GAUGE 5.1 Introduction For the installation to retain optimal accuracy it is important that the free space requirements are fulfilled. Obstacles in the tank may affect the measuring accuracy. Note

It is important to choose an optimum position and orientation of the Radar Tank Gauge (RTG) and Gauge Socket (GS) to keep the interference echo (from obstacles) as low as possible.

5.1.1 Locating the Radar Tank Gauge In order to minimize the margin of error from trim and list corrections, it is recommended to locate the Radar Tank Gauge (RTG) as close to the tank centre as possible. By locating the RTG close to the tank centre on deck, hence close to centre of gravity, the influence of trim and list is at its minimum. Cargo inlet and cargo pump will in different situations disturb the cargo surface, hence reduce the accuracy of the RTG.

5.1.2 Reflections from obstacles Obstacles in or very close to the antenna cone will reduce the accuracy in the vicinity of the obstructions. The influence of the obstruction will depend on the nature of the obstruction. Transverse beams, corner reflectors, and pipes give strong echoes. Means should be taken to reduce the influence of the obstructions in order to retain the accuracy of the RTG. Alternatively the obstructions have to be at adequate distance to the RTG's centre line (CL) in order to remove or reduce the influence of them. It is possible to handle several obstructions in software, but the accuracy will be reduced in the vicinity of these obstructions. Note

Exceptions from the free space requirements have to be approved by Kongsberg Maritime before continuing the planning. Contact Kongsberg Maritime if there are uncertainties. See chapter “Methods to reduce influence of obstructions”.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

15

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

5.2 Free-space requirements and methods to reduce the influence of obstructions The radar radiates the energy in a beam. Obstructions or liquid in the beam will reflect energy back. Obstructions should not be placed within the primary free-space cone (primary cone) in Figure 2. Most obstructions located outside this cone will not influence the measurements. However some obstructions, particularly pipes and corner reflectors, may potentially influence the measurements even if they are located outside the primary cone.

Figure 2.

The primary free space cone

GLA-300 Primary free space cone (from CL)

4°

Table 1. Beam-width of the antenna

16

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

Note

The free-space requirements and the methods to reduce the influence of the obstructions are devised in order to retain FULL accuracy in the measuring range of the RTG. If the recommendations are not followed the accuracy will be reduced in the vicinity of the obstruction. If this is acceptable it is possible to relax the demands and still retain the stability of the readings. The system software has incorporated the possibility to handle one or more obstructions.

5.2.1 Methods to reduce the influence of obstructions The following methods can reduce the influence of the obstructions: 1

Locate the Radar Tank Gauge (RTG) where no obstacles affect the radar beam.

2

Deflection plates can be welded on top of the longitudinal frames in the primary cone.

3

Deflection plates on the obstructions in, or in the vicinity, of the primary cone

4

In case there is doubt whether the best available RTG location is satisfactory for the measurement, shipyard should inquire KM to check location by real measurements. In this process, KM will check different orientations of the RTG (sometimes rotating the RTG can be enough to reduce the effect of the obstructions to an acceptable level).

5

In cases where the above mentioned measures are not sufficient, measurements must be done through still-pipes.

Some particular obstructions will be shown and measures given in order to reduce the influence of the obstructions.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

17

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

5.2.2 Corner reflectors The reflecting structure which causes the strongest reflections is the "corner reflector". These reflectors reflect all energy illuminating the corner area back to the radar. The corner reflector can potentially influence the readings even when they are outside the primary cone. The influence of the corner reflector decreases as a function of the distance from the primary cone. In Table 2 the recommended distance needed for a total cancellation of the corner reflection is given. At this distance the full accuracy of the RTG will be retained without mounting deflection plates. If reduced accuracy can be tolerated in the vicinity of corner reflection, the influence of it can be handled in software. When localizing the sensor on the tank, care should be taken to avoid reflections from structure which may act as corner reflectors.

Recommended angle to corner reflector without deflection plates

CL

Figure 3.

18

Corner reflector

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

GLA-300 Recommended angle to corner reflector without deflection plates

10°

Table 2. Minimum angle to corner reflector without deflection plates Note

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

The influence of the corner reflector can be reduced by mounting deflection plates. If reduced accuracy can be tolerated in the vicinity of corner reflection it can also be handled in software.

19

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

5.2.3 Longitudinal frames in the primary cone Deflection plates have to be welded to the longitudinal or transverse beams located in the primary cone. These plates should have an angle of 15° to 25°. See illustration in Figure 4.

Figure 4.

Longitudinal frames with deflection plates in the antenna zone

Deflection plates direct the reflected signal away from the antenna. Usually, it is sufficient to weld plates only to the two beams located closest to the antenna axis (on both sides of the CL). See Figure 5 for a close-up view of the mounted deflection plates. •

The deflection plates must be big enough to cover the obstruction within the radar cone.

•

The deflection plates must be mounted with an angle between 15 ° and 25 °.

20

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

•

The material must be suitable metal (subject to class approval).

Deflection plates 15 ° to 25 °

Figure 5.

Close-up view of mounted deflection plates

5.2.4 Radar Tank Gauge close to bulkhead The tank wall or bulkhead will also influence the reflected signal if it is localized inside the antenna cone, see Figure 6. Mounting the Radar Tank Gauge (RTG) close to the wall will lead to inaccuracies in the measurements.

12,0°

Figure 6.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Free space requirements are not fulfilled

21

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

A CL

Figure 7.

Distance between Radar Tank Gauge centre line and tank wall/bulkhead

The minimum required distance A between the tank wall and the Radar Tank Gauge centre line is given in Table 3. Height of tank, Hb (m)

Minimum distance A (m)

< 10

0.7

< 20

1.4

< 30

2.1

< 40

2.8

> 40

3.5

Table 3. Distance A in connection with height of tank

22

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

Pipes in the tank Pipes will represent a strongly reflecting radar target. Given the nature of the pipe it will potentially influence the readings when it is outside the primary cone. The influence of the pipe decreases as a function of the distance from the primary cone. In Figure 8 the recommended angle from CL is given. At the recommended angle the full accuracy of the RTG will be retained without mounting deflection plates.

Figure 8.

Precautions to be taken when installing Radar Tank Gauge in cargo tanks with pipes

GLA-300 Recommended angle to pipe without

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

8°

23

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

deflection plates Table 4. Angle to pipe without mounting deflection plates Note

Pipes should not be located inside the primary cone. Particularly large pipes since this, additionally, might lead to blocking of the signal. Smaller pipes can meanwhile be covered with deflection plates in order to reduce their influence. See Figure 9.

Figure 9.

Note

24

Pipes should not be routed inside the antenna zone

The influence of the pipe can be reduced by mounting deflection plates. If reduced accuracy can be tolerated in the vicinity of pipe, it is also possible to handle the obstruction in software.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

Optimal Radar Tank Gauge positioning is shown in Figure 10.

Recommended angle to pipe, see Figure 8

Figure 10. Radar Tank Gauge free-space requirement is fulfilled

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

25

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

5.2.5 Platforms, staircases and horizontal girders As well as for other obstacles the Radar Tank Gauge (RTG) should be located away from platforms, ladders and staircases and horizontal girders which can disturb the beam. See Figure 11. In unavoidable cases deflection plates or still-pipes must be mounted. Figure 12 illustrates a situation where the free-space requirement is not fulfilled.

12,0°

Figure 11.

26

Obstacles like ladders have to be avoided in the primary cone

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

Figure 12.

Free space requirement for Radar Tank Gauge is not fulfilled

5.2.6 Heating coils in antenna zone Heating coils, which are located 5 to 15 cm above the bottom, should be routed outside the primary cone as in Figure 13.

Figure 13.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Heating coils avoided in the antenna zone

27

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

5.2.7 Cargo inlet To avoid the radar beam being disturbed by the cargo inlet the Radar Tank Gauge should be located in proper distance away from the inlet pipe to avoid the turbulent cargo surface in the tank. Figure 14 illustrates this. The distance to the inlet should at least be the primary cone.

Figure 14. Radar Tank Gauge in proper distance from cargo inlet pipe The minimum required distance B between the cargo inlet and the Radar Tank Gauge centre line is given in Table 5. Height of tank, Hb (m)

Minimum distance B (m)

< 10

1.7

< 20

2.4

< 30

3.1

< 40

3.8

> 40

4.5

Table 5. Distance B in connection with height of tank

28

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

5.2.8 Inert gas inlet It is important that the Radar Tank Gauge (RTG) is not mounted straight in front of or too close to the inert gas inlet in a tank. The distance between the sensor and the inlet should not be less than four (4) metres. If not, condensation of carbon and dirt from the inert gas may deposit on the radar antenna, which may lead to instable and inaccurate readings. See Figure 15 for location of RTG and inert gas inlet pipe. Min. 4 m

Inert inlet

Figure 15. Inert gas inlet at minimum distance 4 metres from RTG

5.2.9 Still pipes When there are too many obstructions which cannot be avoided or be covered with deflections plates, the radar measurements have to be done through a still pipe, see Figure 16.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

29

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

Figure 16. Installation of still-pipe when free-space requirements are not possible to fulfil

30

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

6 THE RADAR TANK GAUGE ON THE GAUGE SOCKET 6.1 Introduction The Radar Tank Gauge (RTG) for the GL-300 series is mounted onto a Gauge Socket (GS) on deck. The GS will normally be shipyard supply; however it may optionally be delivered by Kongsberg Maritime. The Gauge Socket can be made in several sizes, 200 mm as standard and minimum diameter. The only fixed reference parameter is the dimensions for the mounting bolts underneath the RTG and the minimum diameter. The RTG units are mounted on top of the tank, leaving no part of the system in physical contact with the tank content. Only a small hole in the tank top/deck of Ø223 mm is required for the standard GS. Note

The RTG must not be mounted on the Gauge Socket before all internal coating of the actual tank has been completed.

6.2 The radar tank gauge GLA-300 The Radar Tank Gauge GLA-300 has a parabolic offset antenna intended for use on most tankers; crude oil, product and chemical tankers included. For clean solution a horn variant may be preferred. The RTG is shown in Figure 17.

Figure 17. The GLA-300 Radar Tank Gauge

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

31

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

6.3 The Radar Tank Gauge on Gauge Sockets The standard Gauge Socket has an inner diameter of 200 mm and has a length of 500 mm. Both the diameter and the length of the GS can be increased. The flange on the socket must fit the flange on the radar. See figure 19 as an exaple. The maximum length depends on the diameter and the position of the antenna relative the centre line of the GS. At Ø200 mm the maximum length is 800 mm. At larger diameters, lengths above 800 mm are possible. Contact Kongsberg Maritime if this is required.

6.3.1 The RTG mounted on a Ø200 mm Gauge Socket The Radar Tank Gauge (RTG) is most often mounted on an Ø200 mm Gauge Socket (GS) as shown in Figure 18. Angular adapter is also available. For more detail see chapter 9.

Radar Tank Gauge unit housing

Inspection hatch with optional cleaning nozzle

Gauge Socket (shipyard supply)

Figure 18. The Radar Tank Gauge mounted on a Ø200 mm gauge socket

32

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

6.3.2 The RTG mounted on a Ø500 mm Gauge Socket (optional) The Radar Tank Gauge (RTG) can be mounted on a larger Gauge Socket (GS) than Ø200 mm. A RTG on an Ø500 mm socket is shown in Figure 19. The Gauge Socket is normally shipyard supply.

Figure 19. Ø500 mm Gauge Socket with sounding plug

6.3.3 Optional Manual sounding plug The manual sounding plug is only possible to incorporate when applying the Radar Tank Gauge to a Gauge Socket which is larger than Ø200 mm, as in Figure 19.

6.3.4 Radar house with variant nipples The radar housing is available with several different cable solutions.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

33

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

This makes it possible to use cables with outer diameter from 12.5 mm to 23.0 mm for the communication cable to CCR, and 8.0 mm to 15.0 mm for the cable to the temperature sensors. For CCR cable with other dimensions than the standard 12.5 mm – 20.5 mm special adaptors will be needed. Adaptors are also needed when using protection hoses. The following variants are available: 1. GLA-300 house with different dimension cable outlets. One large cable outlet for CCR communication cable (diameters from 12.5 mm up to 23.0 mm) and one smaller cable outlet for temperature cable (from 8 mm up to 15.0 mm). The positions for the CCR cable and the temperature cable will not be interchangeable on these housings. 2. GLA-300 house with same dimensions cable outlet. Two large dimension cable outlets makes it possible to choose which cable outlet that are to be used for CCR cable and which one to use for temperature cable. Cable dimensions allowed are the same (CCR communication cable with diameters from 12.5 mm up to 23.0 mm and temperature cable from 8 mm up to 15.0 mm). The GLA-300 house is ordered with cable gland to match project delivery specification. However it is possible to interchange the cable glands if necessary. Thread lock (Locktite 222 or equivalent) must be applied if the cable glands or adaptors is loosened or removed from their original position during installation.

6.3.5 RTG still pipe solution for slop tank The GL-300 Horn antenna mounted on a standpipe are to be used on slop tanks when a free radar beam is impossible to obtain due to tank obstructions.

34

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

Figure 20. GLA-300 Horn antenna

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

35

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

GLA-300 Horn antenna mounted on 3.5’’ flanged standpipe.

Figure 21. GLA-300/HS mounted on 3.5” flanged standpipe

36

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

GLA-300 Horn antenna mounted on 3.5’’ welded standpipe.

Figure 22. GLA-300/HS mounted on 3.5” welded standpipe

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

37

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

6.3.6 RTG cables installed into cable protection pipes

Figure 23. RTG cables installed into cable protection pipes

38

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

6.3.7 RTG installation with flexible hose on cable An option is that the cables can be installed with protective flexible hose. Illustrations for installation of flexible hose.

Mount the flex hose adapter, but don’t fasten it Fasten the cable gland, and finalize with fasten the flex hose adapter.

Fasten the flexible hose and make sure the drain hole is positioned downwards

GLA-300 flexible hose installed on both glands.

Figure 24. GLA-300 with protection hose

6.3.8 Connection of optional jet nozzle A jet nozzle for cleaning of the RTG’s antenna can be connected to the inspection hatch as an option. A jet nozzle may be necessary on certain vessels, e.g. ice class and chemical ships (ref. classification societies). The nozzle is supplied with a rapid coupling for easy connection of pump equipment. P-GL300/DE Rev. E

39

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

The nozzle must be fitted so that it points towards the radar antenna. Note

Only cleaning agents not harming the cargo must be used.

Figure 25. Cleaning equipment with jet nozzle

40

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

6.3.9 Cleaning nozzle on stand pipe installation

Figure 26. Cleaning equipment with jet nozzle

For cleaning the surface of the horn antenna inside the socket and still pipe, a solution with a PTFE hose connected from the cleaning nozzle via a metal tube is designed.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

41

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

Figure 27. Still pipe with cleaning equipment with jet nozzle

6.3.10 Installation of pipe adapter for 4.0’ pipes

The GLA-300 horn antenna is developed to fit a 3.5’ pipe solution. To be able to measure on a 4.0’ pipe, an adapter is developed to be mounted between the radar and the pipe.

42

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

Figure 28. Still pipe adapter from 3.5’ to 4.0’ pipe

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

43

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

7 CONNECTION OF OTHER SENSORS 7.1 General As a standard, up to three temperature sensors MN1535 and one inert gas pressure transmitter are connected to the Signal Processing Unit (SPU). The transmitters communicate by HART protocol on the same cable, routed from the Cargo Temperature Unit via the Radar Tank Gauge to the Signal Processing Unit. When FRAMO pumps are used, the temperature sensors MN1535 are mounted in an existing pipe combined with the cargo pump.

7.2 Atmospheric pressure transmitter or draft pressure transmitters Other measurement points (draft, atmospheric pressure, service level, ballast level etc) can be connected to DPU’s in the cargo cabinet. See Figure 1.

44

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

8 CABLING 8.1 General This chapter is meant to give brief information of cable installation and requirement and specifications from class societies and other authorities. For further details on regulations and standards, see Appendix 1.

8.2 Cable specifications The Radar Tank Gauge and the Cargo Temperature Unit are as standard connected to the Signal Processing Unit (SPU) by a 3twisted pair overall screened cable. The cable has the following specifications: • Minimum conductor cross-sectional area:

0.5 mm².

• Minimum outer diameter:

12.5 mm.

• Maximum outer diameter:

23.0 mm.

• Maximum length (see note *): − Conductor cross-sectional area 0.5 mm²:

100 m.

− Conductor cross-sectional area 0.75 mm²:

150 m.

− Conductor cross-sectional area 1.0 mm²:

200 m.

− Conductor cross-sectional area 1.5 mm²:

300 m.

• Maximum cable loop resistance: • Maximum Lo/Ro:

8 ohm. 17 µH/ohm.

The cable connecting GLA-300 and GC-300 on deck is an extension of the HART pair between GLA-300 and GLK-300. This cable only needs to be 1-twisted pair overall screened, and can be up to 70 m long in addition to the maximum lengths mentioned above for the main cable. Remark that the same minimum conductor cross-sectional area applies. The outer diameter for the cable between the GLA-300 and GC-300 can be in the range from 8 to 15 mm. To double the maximum length between GLK-300 and GLA300 it is possible to use a 4-twisted pair overall screened cable (instead of 3-twisted pair) and use two of those pairs for power as indicated in the connection drawing in figure 39.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

45

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

Note

*) Cable type and installation is subject to classification society approval. Ref. IEC publication 60092-602

8.3 Connections – overview Table 5 shows the connection of the cable between the Radar Tank Gauge (RTG) and the Signal Processing Unit (SPU). Table 6 shows the connection of the cable between the Cargo Temperature Unit (CTU) and the Radar Tank Gauge. The installation of the RTG and the CTU is to be referred to as instrumentation installation, and is intrinsically safe. When cable is routed the guidance given in IEC 60533 shall be applied, C.2.4 state: “cables of different categories which run parallel for a distance exceeding 1 m should be installed with an intermediate free space of 10 cm minimum between the different categories of cable”.

Signal Cable pair Cable core HART+ HART485 A485 B+ 0 volt + 10 volt

1 1 2 2 3 3

1 2 3 4 5 6

Terminal Terminal block (RTG) block (SPU) 1 2 3 4 5 6

X4.5 (X1.5) X4.6 (X1.6) X3.6 (X2.6) X3.5 (X2.5) X4.4 (X1.4) X3.4 (X2.4)

Table 6. Cable connection in Radar Tank Gauge (RTG) and Signal Processing Unit (SPU). Figures in brackets for the SPU are alternative connections. Signal Cable pair Cable core HART+ HART-

1 1

1 2

Terminal Terminal block (RTG) block (CTU) 1 2

1 2

Table 7. Cable connection in Radar Tank Gauge (RTG) and Cargo Temperature Unit (CTU) Note

46

You will find the complete cabling standards (“Standards 60533 0 1 EC:1999(E)”) in Appendix 1.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

9 INSTALLATION OF THE GLA-300 RADAR TANK GAUGE 9.1 Radar Tank Gauge installation on gauge socket

The Radar Tank Gauge (RTG) is mounted onto a Gauge Socket (GS). In this chapter you can find detailed installation instructions for the mechanical mounting as well as the electrical installation.

Figure 29. Radar Tank Gauge GLH-300/P on Ø200 mm gauge socket

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

47

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

9.2 Radar Tanks Gauge on angular gauge socket The RTG adapts to an angular adapter with inner diameter of 200 mm. The angular adapter shall be welded to the top of the tank, preferably as close to the centre of gravity of the tank as possible.

Figure 30. Radar Tank Gauge GLA-300/H on Ø200 mm angular gauge socket

9.3 Physical description of Gauge Socket for Radar Tank Gauge The Gauge Socket’s (GS) physical dimensions are shown in Figure 31. All dimensions are in millimetre (mm).

48

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

Figure 31. Gauge Socket sized 200 mm (normally yard supply). Hatch flange type (DIN, JIS, ANSI) may vary according to yard/customer specification Cable rails are optional dependant on installation method..

9.3.1 Mounting and welding of Gauge Socket for Radar Tank Gauge For mounting and welding the GS to deck/tank top, please follow the instructions in the following Figures; 32 to 35.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

49

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

Cut a hole Ø223 in the tank top. Based on drawing GL-1340

Figure 32. Mounting and welding procedure of the Gauge Socket (I) Place the Gauge Socket centrally located in the hole with an insert of 50 mm (see Figure34). When the ship is even keel, adjust tank socket flange to be horizontal within +/-1 degree in longitudinal (trim) and transversal (list) direction. Spot weld 4 spots, 2 longitudinal and 2 transversal, to secure alignment before completing welding. Note! : The direction of the E plane, and consequently the cleaning hatch, may vary depending on space on deck and/or tank interior conditions, and will therefore be subject to individual advice. See also Figure 34 and 35.

E-plane indication in Electromagnetic plane.

figure

is

illustration

of

the

antenna

Figure 33. Mounting and welding procedure of the Gauge Socket (II)

50

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

Tank socket welding must be done according to drawing number US-644. Figure 34. Mounting and welding procedure of the Gauge Socket (III)

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

51

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

Based on drawing US-644.

Figure 35. Mounting and welding procedure of the Gauge Socket (IV)

52

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

9.4 Radar Tank Gauge dimensions Figure 36 shows the Radar Tank Gauge (RTG) dimensions in millimetre.

Based on drawing GL-2459.

Figure 36. Radar Tank Gauge physical dimensions

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

53

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

9.5 Installation of the Radar Tank Gauge 9.5.1 Installation of Radar Tank Gauge 1. Radar Tank Gauge GLA-300 2. Tank Socket 3. Flat gasket (yard supply). May differ in appearance 4. Main cable 5. Cargo Temperature GC-300 Cable 6. M20x55 Hex Head Bolt 7. M20 Hex Nut 8. M20 Lock Washer 9. Serrated Lock Washer

Figure 37. Main parts of Radar Tank Gauge GLA-300/P

54

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

1. Radar Tank Gauge GLA-300 2. Tank Socket 3. Flat gasket (yard supply). May differ in appearance 4. M20x55 Hex Head Bolt 5. M20 Lock Washer 6. M20x55 Hex Nut 7. Serrated Lock Washer

Figure 38. Main parts of Radar Tank Gauge GLA-300/H

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

55

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

Note

The Radar Tank Gauge unit shall not be mounted onto the Gauge Socket before tank painting / coating work is finished.

9.5.2 Installation description Radar Tank Gauge unit preparation 1. Put the flat gasket on top of the Gauge Socket (standard JIS 5K200 gasket which must be cargo resistant). 2. Place the RTG on top with cable glands directed as shown in Figure 37 (or complete RTG unit rotated 180 degrees).(GL2630) 3. Apply bolt lubrication, Antiseize on the bolt threads before fastening the bolts loosely in a diagonal clockwise pattern. Repeat pattern with an increasing stud torque up to 150 Nm.

9.5.3 Cable entry and connection See External connection drawing Figure 39, Figure 40 and description below for main cable entering into the Radar Tank Gauge (RTG). 1. Unscrew the nuts on the RTG locking ring and remove the locking ring. 2. Lift off the RTG top cover to get access to the inside. While being removed from the RTG, handle the cover carefully to prevent dirt or contamination to access the cover gasket, the cover rim, or the inside. 3. Prepare cables according to Figure 40. 4. Connect the main cable to electronic unit GLH-300 according to connection diagram in Figure 39 (GL-2641). 5. After connection of cables, put the cover back on the RTG. Ensure that all parts are clean. Special attention must be shown to the gasket and gasket mating surfaces, ref. item 2.

56

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

Figure 39. Electrical connection of GLA-300

Prepare the cable end and enter the cable through the cable gland according to instructions below. Remember that the acceptable range of the cable outer diameter is from 12.5 mm to 20.5 mm. (Up to 23.0 mm with an adapter installed)

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

57

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

Figure 40. GLA-300 main cable mounting method. The connection between GLA300 and GC-300 shall be carried out in the same manner, see chapter 10 (this is the smallest gland on the GLA-300 unit).

58

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

Gland sizes/torque Thread (M)

Range(mm)

Torque(NM)

M20x1.5

8-15

5

M25x1.5

12.5-20

7

M32x1.5

17-25.5

6

The specified torques are maximum values for compression nuts. These nuts should be tightened until the torque specified in the table is reached OR until the sealing insert protrudes slightly over the compression nut. Intermediate connecting pieces (lower part of cable gland) should be tightened with the respective thread size and protected against inadvertent loosening.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

59

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

10 INSTALLATION OF THE GC-300 CARGO TEMPERATURE UNIT The Cargo Temperature Unit can either be mounted together with the cargo pump or on open deck. An overview of the Cargo Temperature Unit open deck installation is shown below in Figure 41. GC-300/- Cargo Temperature Unit Cable pipe

Adapter Tank top

Tank wall

To reduce the response time, it is recommended to fill the protection pipe with a liquid. The measurement then will also be more concentrated at the measuring point. Different types of liquids can be used, but it is recommended to use transformer oil, which can be delivered by most oil companies. The liquid/oil must: • Suit the cargo temperature. • Not corrode the sensors and pipes. • Not, in case of leaks, be harmful to the cargo. • Not freeze or crystallize in the temperature range.

Support

Protection pipe

Figure 41. Overview of the GC-300 installation

60

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

10.1 System layout of GC-300 tank installation

Based on drawing: GC-221

All dimensions in millimetre (mm).

Figure 42. System layout GC-300 installation

10.2 Physical description of separate parts 10.2.1 GC-300 Cargo Temperature Unit for maximum 3 temperature sensors

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

61

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

All dimensions in millimetre (mm).

Based on drawing.: GC-218

Figure 43. The GC-300 Cargo Temperature Unit

62

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

10.2.2 UP-1052 adapter

Based on drawing.: UP-1052

All dimensions in millimetre (mm).

Figure 44. The UP-1052 adapter

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

63

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

10.2.3 MN1535 temperature sensor

Based on drawing.: MN-1535

All dimensions in millimetre (mm).

Figure 45. The MN1535 temperature sensor (Pt100 & Pt1000 applicable for GL300)

64

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

10.3 Installation of GC-300 on UP-1052/353167 adapter 1: Inspect that the adapter [7] and the sensor protection pipe beneath are made and assembled/welded and leakage tested acording to drawing MN-4511. 2: Unscrew tension ring nut [1] with a 10 mm wrench, and remove tension ring. Then remove cover [2] with gasket and electronics and put them on a safe dry place. 3: Make sure that the adapter [7] gasket area is clean. Place the gasket [6] on top of adapter [7]. Then place the GC-300 [5] correctly oriented on top of the gasket. 4: Fasten GC-300 by using the 4 unbraco bolts and washers placed inside the box. 6 mm unbraco key. Torque: 40 Nm. 5: If wiring occur later, put back the cover with electronics and gasket [2] and fasten the tension Based on drawing: GC-223_1

Figure 46. Installation of GC-300 on UP-1052 adapter

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

65

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

Figure 47. Installation of GC-300 on UP-1052 / 353167 Adapter and protection pipe

1 2 3 4 5

66

Protection pipe Ø30x2 or 34.4x3.38 Pipe suspension Muff Adapter UP-1052 or 353167 Bottom coin

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

10.4 Installation of GC-300 on a FRAMO Tank Pump installation 1: FRAMO pump [7] and the temperature sensor protection pipe beneath the pump flange are made and assembled/welded by pump supplier. 2: Unscrew tension ring nut [1] with a 10 mm wrench, and remove tension ring. Then remove cover [2] with gasket and electronics and put them on a safe dry place. 3: Make sure that the gasket area is clean. Place the gasket [6] on top of the corresponding holes in the FRAMO flange . Then place the GC-300 [5] correctly oriented on top of the gasket.

2 Based on drawing: GC-222_1

4: Fasten GC-300 by using the 4 unbraco bolts [3] and washers [4] placed inside the box. 6 mm unbraco key. Torque: 40 Nm. 5: If wiring occur later, put back the cover with electronics and gasket [2] and fasten the tension ring.

Figure 48. Installalation og GC-300 on a FRAMO Tank Pump installation

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

67

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

10.5 Installation of MN1535 temperature sensors 1. Unscrew tension ring nut with a 10 mm wrench, and remove tension ring. Then remove cover with gasket and electronics and put them on a safe dry place Prepare and install the main temperature cable [1] according to drawing GC-224. Inspect that the main cable screen is evenly distributed before fastening the screen clamp [2]. 2. Remove the extra blindplug(s) [7]. They are needed when the number of temperature sensors are less then three.

Based on drawing: GC-223_2

Based on drawing: GC-222_2

Figure 49. Installation of MN1535 temperature sensors (part I) for both open deck and FRAMO Tank Pump installation

68

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

3. Push the sensor end of the longest temperature sensor MN1535 [3] through the hole in the GC-300 connection box bottom (Fig. 1), enter the mantle nipple threads [4] by hand (Fig. 2), push the wires through the installation tool [8] and lower the tool over the nut [6], ring [5], and mantle nipple [4] (Fig. 3) and fasten the nipple. Torque: 30 Nm. 4. Then lift the tool until it engages the nut [6] (Fig. 4) and fasten it. Torque 25 Nm. Repeat the procedure on the middle sensor MN1535 and upper sensor MN1535. 5. Connect wires according to connection diagram on drawing GC-223_3

Based on drawing: GC-223_2

Figure 50. Installation of MN1535 temperature sensors (part II) for both open deck and FRAMO Tank Pump installation

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

69

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

10.6 Connection of MN1535 temperature sensors

X1: Top sensor X2: Middle sensor Based on drawing.: GC-223_3

X3: Bottom sensor

Figure 51. Connection of MN1535 temperature sensors

70

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

10.7 GC-300 installation with flexible hose An option is that the cables can be installed with protective flexible hose. Illustrations for installation of flexible hose.

Mount the flex hose adapter, but don’t fasten it.

Fasten the cable gland, and finalize with fasten the flex hose adapter.

Fasten the flexible hose and make sure the drain hole is positioned downwards

GC-300 complete installed

Figure 52. GC-300 with protection hose

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

71

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

10.8 GC-300 cable preparation

72

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

Figure 53. GC-300 cable preparation (I)

Based on drawing.: GC-224

Figure 54. GC-300 cable preparation (II)

Based on drawing.: GC-224

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

73

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

11 APPENDIX 1 Extract of “Standards 60533 0 1 EC:1999(E) – Measures to achieve EMC” Annex C (informative) Measures to achieve EMC C.1 Applicability This annex contains guidelines and recommendations for organisational and technical measures to achieve electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) in ships and in ships' equipment. These preventive measures concern electric and electronic equipment and, in special cases, non-electric equipment. These guidelines and recommendations have proven successful in practical application, however, under certain circumstances; additional measures may become necessary to achieve the desired level of EMC. Use of these guidelines and recommendations will help ensure that the EMC performance achieved for items of equipment will be maintained in an installation. C.2 General technical measures Effective measures to achieve EMC should be taken so that neither safety of the ship's crew and of the vessel nor the reliable operation of electric installations shall in any way be jeopardised. IEC 60092-101 and IEC 60092-201 should be observed. EMC measures should equally extend to:

74

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

•

Decoupling the interference path between source and affected equipment/system; - reduction of the level of emission at its source; - increasing the immunity to the disturbance at the affected equipment/system.

The following measures can be applied individually or in combination: •

Screening;

•

Grounding;

•

Suitable cable routing, cable separation and cable selection;

•

Selection of suitable equipment mounting place;

•

Filtering;

•

Use of special components (for example over voltage protectors);

•

Use of special devices (for example to separate different potentials);

•

Organisational measures (for example alternating operation of devices).

Details can be found in C.2.2, C.2.3, C.2.4 and C.2.5. Other measures are related to equipment and installations and details can be found in clause C.3. Organisational measures are described in clause C.4. Special recommendations or comments concerning equipment, items or individual installations are detailed in groups A to F of C.2.1. The combination of all equipment, items and installations interconnected for the intended performance of a given function is called an "integrated system". If certain technical measures for the integration process need to be taken, or if these measures have proven recommendable in practical applications, or, again, exceed those detailed in C.2.1, groups A to F, such measures have been listed in group G. C2.1 Equipment and installation groups Group A: Radio communication and navigation equipment. Typical properties: operation with radiated signals. Examples: transmitters and receivers for maritime radio communication and navigation services and on-board communication systems. Group B: Power generation and conversion equipment.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

75

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

Typical properties: broadband interference. Examples: rectifiers, inverters, converters (power electronics), rotating converters, generators, deck machinery, domestic equipment, fluorescent lamps, discharge lamps. Group C: Equipment operating with pulsed power. Typical properties: periodical transient interferences with high energy. Examples: radar and sonar systems, echo sounders. Group D: Switchgear and control systems. Typical properties: transient interferences. Examples: switchboards, relay-operated control devices, motor starters, and electric heating systems. Group E: Intercommunication and signal processing equipment. Typical properties: operation with analogue and digital signals. Examples: automation system, computers, sensors, public-address, signalling and alarm systems. Group F: Non-electrical items and equipment. Typical properties: generation broadband interference. Example: rigging.

of

parasitic

Group G: Integrated systems. Typical properties: interference resulting from the simultaneous operation of equipment and installations from groups A to F. Example: navigational equipment with sensors in the upper deck area as well as keel area, integrated propulsion system, cargo monitoring system with sensors and equipment in different zones. C.2.2 Screening Equipment and devices need to be effectively screened, i.e.:

76

•

Installation in metallic enclosures;

•

Use of screened cables, including suitable cable glands, preferably at the cable entry point of metallic enclosures;

•

Utilisation of metal bulkheads and decks for screening, and grounding of cable screens at penetration points where possible.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

C.2.3 Grounding All metallic enclosures and metallic equipment items need to be effectively grounded. The requirements of the equipment manufacturer should be observed. The aim of all grounding procedures is to unite the reference potential of distributed equipment items. In principle there are two different ways to minimise any difference in potential of different reference conductors: •

Grounding of reference conductors in a star pattern;

•

Grounding of reference conductors on a ground plane.

In the star-grounding pattern, all reference conductors are connected to one single point, i.e. the ground point. Only this single ground point should have a conductor to the ship's structure. For a ground plane pattern, all reference conductors should be connected to the ship's structure at the closest possible point and at as many points as is feasible. The result is a ground reference plane with the smallest possible ground-loops and smallest possible inductance. The following criteria should be used to select the proper grounding method: •

The star pattern should be used for DC and AC up to 10 kHz;

•

The ground plane pattern should be used for frequencies above 100 kHz;

•

Either grounding method is acceptable in the frequency range between 10 kHz and 100 kHz.

The ground plane pattern is preferred. All ground connections should have the following properties:

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

•

Low HF impedance;

•

Smallest possible length (small inductance);

•

Vibration-resistance of connectors and conductors;

•

Corrosion resistance;

•

Access for routine inspection.

77

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

All contact areas must be metallically clean, free from paint or oxides or other insulating layers. It is recommended that corrosion protection spray or paste is applied at each contact point before final assembly. Solid metal strips of minimum length should be used instead of flexible braided bands. Ground loops should be kept to a minimum. In order to avoid interference by undefined bonding all non-electrical metallic items on the weather deck with a dimension exceeding 1m (for example rigs) should be connected to the ship's structure by means of good electrical connection. In exceptional cases an object may be electrically insulated. Wherever possible, metallic enclosures of electrical equipment should be directly screwed or welded to the ship's structure. Separate ground conductors should be used in cases where a ground connection cannot be effected by a metallically clean screwed connection. The contact between the ground conductor and the equipment or the ship's structure may be either screwed or welded. Ground conductors for connection of metal items on the free deck to the ship's structure should be produced from corrosion-resistant steel (solid or flexible). Ground conductors inside the ship will generally be made from copper. Metallic doors, protective covers, etc. should be connected to the respective enclosures by means of short, separate and possibly flexible conductors. Pieces of cable trays and protective cable piping should have electrical connections to each other and to the ship's structure at as many points as possible. Metallic cable jackets and cable screens should generally be grounded to the metallic enclosure of the equipment or to the ship's structure at as many points as is feasible, and at least on both ends of the cable (exception see C.3.5.3). For ships with non-metallic structures, all conductively interconnected metal parts (including ground plate if existing) will form an artificial ground. C.2.4 Cable routing

78

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

The installation requirements of the equipment manufacturer, including cable selection and cable routing, should be adhered to. Cable separation into categories according to different signal types, and cable installation with intermediate free spaces should be used as a major preventive measure. Basically all cables outside the ship's structure should be metal sheathed, metal braided or otherwise adequately screened. Independently of the system they belong to, cables in category 1 up to and including category 4 may be bundled per category. Single cables or bundles of cables of different categories running parallel for distances exceeding 1 m, should be installed with an intermediate free space of 10 cm minimum between the different categories of cables. The same requirement should be observed for cables of the same category but with differing signal levels. Cables belonging to category 1, 4 and 5 should be affixed to a metal surface (deck, bulkhead or cable duct). The metal cable ducts should not be insulated from bulkheads. Special measures may be necessary between cables of category 3 and 4 (for example protective cable piping). The same applies to those cases where the minimum cable separation cannot be implemented.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

79

KONGSBERG Tank Gauging System

Cables for Radio receiver signals 2) TV receiver signals Video signals Analogue and digital signals

Telephone signals Loudspeaker signals Control signals Alarm signals Power supply 1)

Table C.1 – Signal types and cable categories Emission/ Cable Applicable Level immunity Cable type 4) category standard rating 0.1 mV to Extremely 3 Coaxial IEC 60096-1 500 mV sensitive

0.1 V to 115 V

Sensitive

2

IEC 60092-376

10 V to 1000 V

Potentially disturbing

1

10 V to 1000 V

Extremely disturbing

4

Lighting

High-power transmission signals Pulsed high-power signals 2) High powered semi-conductor converter Special applications Fibre optics

Twisted; single screened; IEC 60092-374 screened twisted pairs IEC 60092-375

Below deck: IEC 60092-350 non-screened; IEC 60092-353 above deck: twisted, screened Coaxial; screened power

Special cable

Twisted, screened

IEC 60092-350 IEC 60092-353

Special

5 -

1) Equipment and auxiliary equipment for radio communication and radio navigation should be fitted with screened power supply cables. 2) Receiving antenna cables should be installed with double screen cables or coaxial cables inside protective piping. 3) Cables for radar, sonar equipment and echo sounders should be double screen cables or coaxial cables inside protective piping. 4) The "filling factor" for cable screens as required by the IEC should be adhered to and the transfer impedance at 10 MHz as determined by IEC 60096-1 should not exceed 30 mi2/m.

80

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

Installation manual

Cable screens should be connected in connection boxes or cable drawing boxes. Cable screens should not be used as the return conductor for operating circuits except the outer conductor of coaxial cable. Where it is impossible to meet the separation requirements, cables with high shielding effectiveness should be used, or cable bundles should be laid in metal pipes or conduits. The pipes or conduits should have a minimum thickness of 1mm if not otherwise specified. If a cable runs through a metal pipe or conduit, further separation with regard to the other categories is not necessary. It is recommended to install the cables close to the metallic ship structure or on metallic cable trays. It is recommended to ground cable screens circumferentially at those points where cables penetrate the boundary between the free deck and the ship's interior. These grounding areas must be protected against corrosion.

P-GL300/DE Rev. E

81

CHAPTER 9

Classification approvals

Type approval cert.

CHAPTER 10

Ex-certificates

Page 1 of 4 PROD 004

[1] EC-TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE [2] Equipment or Protected System Intended for use in Potentially explosive atmospheres Directive 94/9/EC [3]

EC-Type Examination Certificate Number:

Nemko 09ATEX1132X Issue 1

[4] [5] [6]

Equipment or Protective System: Applicant/ Manufacturer: Address:

GLA-300. Radar Tank Gauge Kongsberg Maritime AS Haakon VIIs gt. 4 N-7005 Trondheim, Norway

[7]

This equipment or protective system and any acceptable variation thereto is specified in the schedule to this certificate and the documents therein referred to.

[8]

Nemko AS, notified body number 0470 in accordance with Article 9 of Council Directive 94/9/EC of 23 March 1994, certifies that this equipment or protective system has been found to comply with the Essential Health and Safety requirements relating to the design and construction of equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex II to the Directive. The examination and test results are recorded in confidential report no. 148912

[9]

Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with: EN 60079-0: 2006, EN 60079-11: 2007 and EN 60079-26 : 2004

[10]

If the sign “X” is placed after the certificate number, it indicates that the equipment or protective system is subject to special conditions for safe use specified in the schedule to this certificate.

[11]

This EC-TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE relates only to the design, examination and tests of the specified equipment or protective system in accordance to the directive 94/9/EC. Further requirements of the Directive apply to the manufacturing process and supply of this equipment or protective system. These are not covered by this certificate.

[12] The marking of the equipment or protective system shall include the following:

II 1G

Ex ia IIC T4 Ta: -45C ≤ Ta ≤ 85C

Oslo, 2010-05-25

Rolf Hoel Certification Manager, Ex-products

This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included. Postal address: P.O.Box 73 Blindern N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address: Gaustadalléen 30 0373 OSLO

Telephone: +47 22 96 03 30 Fax: +47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number: NO 974404532

Nemko 09ATEX1132X Issue 1

Date: 2010-05-25

Page 2 of 4

[13] Schedule [14] [15]

EC-TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE No

Nemko 09ATEX1132X Issue 1

Description of Equipment or Protective System The GLA-300/X-YZ Radar Tank Gauge is an intrinsically safe level gauging sensor comprising an integral inert pressure transmitter, enclosed in a stainless steel housing. It has digital communication (RS-485 and Hart) to processing equipment in safe area, and shall be connected to power and signal interfaces with compatible safety parameters. Type Designation GLA-300 /X-YZ X: P = Parabola, H = Horn, HS = Horn Standpipe Optional for H and HS variants: Y: 1 = 10 GHz, 2 = 24GHz (operational frequency) Z: 1 = PTFE, 2 = PEEK (lens material) Safety Parameters. Terminals X1. p6, p5 (Power) Maximum input voltage. Maximum input current. Maximum input power. Maximum internal capacitance. Maximum internal inductance.

Ui: Ii: Pi: Ci: Li:

14,3V DC 560 mA 2,1W 347nF Negligible

Ui: Ii: Pi: Ci: Li:

28,0V DC 160 mA 0,85W 9,3nF Negligible

Ui: Ii: Pi: Ci: Li:

7,0V DC 100mA 0,12W Negligible Negligible

Terminals X1. p1, p2 (HART) Maximum input voltage. Maximum input current. Maximum input power. Maximum internal capacitance. Maximum internal inductance. Terminals X1. p3, p4, p5 (RS-485) Maximum input voltage. Maximum input current. Maximum input power. Maximum internal capacitance. Maximum internal inductance.

Range of ambient temperature: -45C ≤ Ta ≤ 85C Degree of protection: IP66/67 according to EN 60529. This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included. Postal address: P.O.Box 73 Blindern N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address: Gaustadalléen 30 0373 OSLO

Telephone: +47 22 96 03 30 Fax: +47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number: NO 974404532

Date: 2010-05-25

Nemko 09ATEX1132X Issue 1 [16]

Page 3 of 4

Report No. 148912

Certificate History and Associated Nemko Reports Issue Date Report Description

0 1

2009-06-23 2010-05-25

119309 148912

Prime Certificate released Certificate updated with the models GLA-300/H and GLA300/HS

Descriptive Documents Name/Number

Rev.

GL-2513

A

Date (yyyy-mm-dd) 2009-06-04

GL-2539 GL-2458

A B

2009-05-28 2009-12-08

GL-2459

B

2010-04-28

GL-2146 GL-2210 GL-2110 GL-2189 GLB-300_9212-462 0.brd BUILDUP_04LAYER STANDARD.pdf PCB_SPEC_GLB-300_9212462 0.pdf GL-2462 GT-1468 E-2691 E-2697 13-1562-TAB 9212-462.0000 DLT6118 DLT6109 KSLT6118

B A A A 0 -

Title/Description

Sheets 1

2009-05-25 2008-01-23 2008-01-22 2008-01-21 2009-05-28 2001-04-11

Safety Control Drawing and Electrical connection of GL-300 Tank Monitoring GLH-300 (GLB-300 Potted) RTG unit GLA-300 Radar Tank Gauging system GLA-300 Tank sensor Radar Tank Gauging system Offset Parabola Feed Assembly Offset Parabola Antenna Cover for Feed PTFE TFM Bolt Glb_300_9212-462 / PCB design 4 LAYER, 1.6mm STANDARD BUILD

-

2009-06-02

PCB Specifications

1

A B A C A D E D

2009-02-09 2009-06-08 2010-02-10 2009-06-03 2006-04-14 2009-05-25 2009-04-20 2009-06-08 2009-04-20

1 3 1 1 1 4 1 1 4

KSLT6109

E

2009-06-08

PSLT6118

A

-

PSLT6109

A

-

TFLT6118 TFLT6109 GL-2557

A A B

2010-03-17

GL-2566

B

2010-04-20

GL-2552

B

2010-04-28

GL-2553

B

2010-04-28

GLB-300 Schematics GLB-300 Schematics Laser tagging for GLA-300 Sticker for GLH-300 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM GLB-300, Bill of materials FMCW Radar module (24Ghz) FMCW Radar module (10Ghz) 24-25.5 GHz FMCW RADAR FRONT END 9.25-10.75 GHz FMCW RADAR FRONT END Viktoria, RS3400K/00 24GHz Microwave Unit for Radar Level Gauging Marit, RS3400X/00 10GHz Microwave Unit for Radar Level Gauging Tillverkningsföreskrift Tillverkningsföreskrift GLA-300/HS Radar Tank Gauge for 3.5” Standpipe Installation Drawing GLA-300/HS Tank Sensor Common Parts Assembly Drawing GLA-300/HS-10PEEK Tank sensor for 10Ghz with PEEK lens for 3.5” Standpipe Assembly Drawing GLA-300/HS-10PTFE Tank sensor for

This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included. Postal address: P.O.Box 73 Blindern N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address: Gaustadalléen 30 0373 OSLO

Telephone: +47 22 96 03 30 Fax: +47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number: NO 974404532

1 1 1 3 2 1 1 4 1

4 1 1 2 2 1 1 1

1

Nemko 09ATEX1132X Issue 1

GL-2554

B

2010-04-28

GL-2555

B

2010-04-28

GL-2550

A

2009-06-24

GL-2544

A

2009-06-17

GL-2547

A

2009-06-17

[17]

[18]

Date: 2010-05-25

10Ghz with PTFE lens for 3.5” Standpipe Assembly Drawing GLA-300/HS-24PEEK Tank sensor for 24GHz with PEEK lens for 3.5” Standpipe and free space applications Assembly Drawing GLA-300/HS-24 PTFE Tank sensor for 24GHz with PTFE lens for 3.5” Standpipe and free space applications Assembly Drawing Lens type GL2550/- for Horn Antenna for 3.5” Standpipe and free space applications Detail Drawing Horn Antenna type GL-2544/10-PEEK for 3.5” Standpipe Weldment Drawing 24GHz Horn Antenna type GL-2547/24PEEK for 3.5” Standpipe and free space applications Weldment Drawing

Page 4 of 4

1

1

4

2

2

Special Conditions for Safe Use 1.

The equipment does not fulfil the dielectric strength requirement according to Clause 6.3.12 of EN 6007911:2007. Special consideration has to be taken under installation. See Safety Control Drawing no. GL-2513.

2.

The potential electrostatic charging/discharging risk on the horn antenna GLA- 300/H has to be observed when used with gas group IIC (hydrogen, acetylene and carbon disulphide). If the mounting conditions imply a minimum distance of 300 mm from socket opening/end and up to the antenna front, the GLA-300/H assembly with a socket is approved for use in gas group IIC. Additionally, no charging mechanisms such as dry rubbing or liquid/mist/vapour/gas/air stream directed towards and no object to touch the antenna front should be allowed while group IIC explosive atmosphere.

Essential Health and Safety Requirements See item 9

This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included. Postal address: P.O.Box 73 Blindern N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address: Gaustadalléen 30 0373 OSLO

Telephone: +47 22 96 03 30 Fax: +47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number: NO 974404532

Page 1 of 3 PROD 001

[1] EC-TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE [2] Equipment or Protected System Intended for use in Potentially explosive atmospheres Directive 94/9/EC [3]

EC-Type Examination Certificate Number:

Nemko 09ATEX1128X Issue 1

[4]

Equipment or Protective System:

GLK-300. Associated power and signal unit for level gauging radar sensor.

[5] [6]

Applicant/ Manufacturer: Address:

Kongsberg Maritime AS Haakon VIIs gt. 4 N-7005 Trondheim, Norway

[7]

This equipment or protective system and any acceptable variation thereto is specified in the schedule to this certificate and the documents therein referred to.

[8]

Nemko AS, notified body number 0470 in accordance with Article 9 of Council Directive 94/9/EC of 23 March 1994, certifies that this equipment or protective system has been found to comply with the Essential Health and Safety requirements relating to the design and construction of equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex II to the Directive. The examination and test results are recorded in confidential report no. 206577

[9]

Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with: CENELEC EN 60079-0: 2006, CENELEC EN 60079-11: 2007 and CENELEC EN 60079-26 : 2004

[10]

If the sign “X” is placed after the certificate number, it indicates that the equipment or protective system is subject to special conditions for safe use specified in the schedule to this certificate.

[11]

This EC-TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE relates only to the design, examination and tests of the specified equipment or protective system in accordance to the directive 94/9/EC. Further requirements of the Directive apply to the manufacturing process and supply of this equipment or protective system. These are not covered by this certificate.

[12] The marking of the equipment or protective system shall include the following:

II (1) G

[Ex ia] IIC Ta: +70C

Oslo, 2012-04-20

Asle Kaastad Certification Manager, Ex-products

This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included. Postal address: P.O.Box 73 Blindern N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address: Gaustadalléen 30 0373 OSLO

Telephone: +47 22 96 03 30 Fax: +47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number: NO 974404532

Nemko 09ATEX1128X Issue 1

Date: 2012-04-20

Page 2 of 3

[13] Schedule [14] [15]

EC-TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE No

Nemko 09ATEX1128X Issue 1

Description of Equipment or Protective System GLK-300 is an associated apparatus for power supply and communication for level gauging radar sensors and auxiliary pressure and temperature transmitters. The power and RS-485 are for connection to the level gauging radar sensor. Hart circuit for pressure and temperature transmitters. More than one transmitter may be connected to the Hart circuit so far as the sums of capacitance and inductance of the transmitters and cables are less or equal to the Co and Lo for GLK-300. Safety parameters. Maximum safe voltage Um: 250V AC Power supply , terminals X2 & X3: p4 - X1& X4: p4 Maximum output voltage. Maximum output current. Maximum output power. Maximum external capacitance. Maximum external inductance. Maximum ratio

U O: I O: P O: CO: LO: Lo/Ro

14,3V DC 360 mA 2,1W 680nF 42H 17 H/

X1 & X4: p5-p6 (HART) Maximum output voltage. Maximum output current. Maximum output power. Maximum external capacitance. Maximum external inductance.

U O: I O: P O: CO: LO:

25,8V DC 115 mA 0,74W 100nF 1,6mH

X2 & X3: p5- p6 (RS-485)-X1&X4: p4 (0V-ref.) Maximum output voltage. UO: 7 V DC Maximum output current. I O: 70 mA Maximum output power. PO: 88 mW Maximum external capacitance. CO: 15,7µF Maximum external inductance. LO: 7mH X1, X2, X3 &X4: p1-p3 (0V/ GND) Range of ambient temperature: -15 C  Ta + 70 C

This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included. Postal address: P.O.Box 73 Blindern N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address: Gaustadalléen 30 0373 OSLO

Telephone: +47 22 96 03 30 Fax: +47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number: NO 974404532

Nemko 09ATEX1128X Issue 1

[16]

Date: 2012-04-20

Page 3 of 3

Report No. 206577

Name/Number GL-2513 E-2693 E-2694 GL-2534 UL RCF1006FR.pdf BUILDUP GLK-300 9212-459.pdf PCB_SPEC_GLK-300_9212-459 GL-2464 BUILDUP_ GLK-300_9212-460 PCB_SPEC_GLK-300_9212-460 GL-2465 9212-459.000 9212-460.000 7212-459.000 7212-460.000

Rev. B A A C A B A B B 1 0

Date 2011-03-28 2009-05-28 2009-05-28 2011-11-24 2009-03-05 2001-02-05 2012-01-24 2012-01-23 2001-04-11 2009-05-28 2012-01-23 2012-01-23 2012-01-23 2011-02-07 2009-05-28

Title/Description Safety Control Drawing and El.con.of GL-300. Sticker for GLK-300. Serial number sticker for GLK-300. Signal Processing Unit GLK-300 (housing). UL iQ™ for Plastics. GLK-300 Main Board, PCB, 8 Layer, 1.6 mm GLK-300 Main Board, PCB Specifications. GLK-300 Main Board, Schematics. GLK-300 Piggyback Board, 4 LAYER, 1.6mm. GLK-300 Piggyback Board, PCB Specifications. GLK-300 Piggyback Board, Schematics. BOM GLK-300 Main board. BOM GLK-300 piggyback board. GLK-300 Main Board, PCB Layout Drawings GLK-300 Piggyback Board, PCB Layout Drawings

Sheets 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6 1 1 2 5 2 10 6

Certificate History and Associated Nemko Reports Issue Date Report Description 0 2009-08-23 119315 Prime Certificate released 1 2012-04-20 206577 Changes in components which do not affect safety. Revised documents. [17]

[18]

Special Conditions for Safe Use 1.

The separation distance of minimum 50mm between intrinsically and non-intrinsically safe circuits has to be observed for the final installation in a cabinet.

2.

The GLK-300 has to be installed in a cabinet with a degree of protection of at least IP20

3.

The ambient temperature range for the GLK-300 is -15°C ≤ Ta ≤ +70°C

4.

The power output circuit has a resistive trapezoidal output characteristic with a maximum U1 voltage 23,5V.

5.

The RS-485 circuit has a safety open voltage Uo: 7V with a maximum voltage 5V for load and thermal assessments.

Essential Health and Safety Requirements See item 9

This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included. Postal address: P.O.Box 73 Blindern N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address: Gaustadalléen 30 0373 OSLO

Telephone: +47 22 96 03 30 Fax: +47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number: NO 974404532

Page 1 of 5

[1] EC-TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE [2] Equipment or Protected System Intended for use in Potentially explosive atmospheres Directive 94/9/EC [3]

EC-Type Examination Certificate Number :

Nemko 02ATEX119X Issue 4

[4]

Equipment or Protective System :

Pressure Transmitter

[5] [6]

Applicant: Address :

[5]

Manufacturer: Address:

Kongsberg Maritime AS N-7005 Trondheim Haakon VIIs gt. 4 Norway Kongsberg Maritime AS N-7005 Trondheim Norway

[6] [7]

This equipment or protective system and any acceptable variation thereto is specified in the schedule to this certificate and the documents therein referred to.

[8]

Nemko AS, notified body number 0470 in accordance with Article 9 of Council Directive 94/9/EC of 23 March 1994, certifies that this equipment or protective system has been found to comply with the Essential Health and Safety requirements relating to the design and construction of equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex II to the Directive. The examination and test results are recorded in confidential report no. :

[9]

204393

Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with:

CENELEC EN 60079-0 : 2009 and CENELEC EN 60079-11: 2007 [10]

If the sign “X” is placed after the certificate number, it indicates that the equipment or protective system is subject to special conditions for safe use specified in the schedule to this certificate.

[11]

This EC-TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE relates only to the design and construction of the specified equipment or protected system. If applicable, further requirements of this Directive apply to the manufacturer and supply of this equipment or protective system.

[12]

The marking of the equipment or protective system shall include the following:

II 1 G

Ex ia IIC T5, Tamb –45C to +85C

Oslo, 2012-06-28

Asle Kaastad Certification Manager, Ex-products

This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included. Postal address: P.O.Box 73 Blindern N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address: Gaustadalléen 30 0373 OSLO

Telephone: +47 22 96 03 30 Fax: +47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number: NO 974404532

Date: 2012-06-28

Nemko 02ATEX119X Issue 4

Page 2 of 5

[13] Schedule [14]

[15]

EC-TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE No

Nemko 02ATEX119X Issue 4

Description of Equipment or Protective System

The certificate covers the GT-series Pressure Transmitters mentioned in the table below for conversion of a pressure into an electrical 4-20mA current loop signal. The pressure transmitters comprise a pressure sensing element and electronic boards enclosed and encapsulated in a cylindrical metallic enclosure.

Type Designations Name

Type

Range

Signal range, Output 4-20mA, 2-wires with HART

GT402

Gauge, sealed gauge, absolute

Up to 600 bar

GT403

Sealed gauge, absolute

Up to 600 bar

4-20mA, 2-wires with HART

GT404

Gauge, sealed gauge, absolute

Up to 40 bar

4-20mA, 2-wires with HART

GT420

Differential

Up to 25 bar

4-20mA 2 wires

GT422

Differential

Up to 25 bar

4-20mA 2 wires

GT423

Differential

Up to 25 bar

4-20mA 2 wires

Material

Connection/design

Body of AISI 316 and wetted parts in AISI316 and Titanium Body and wetted parts in AISI 316 and Titanium.

Connection box with lid and cable gland. Threaded process connection ISO 228-G1/2A. IP66/67

Body of AISI 316 and wetted parts in AISI316, Titanium and Hastelloy Body of Stainless Steel and wetted parts in AISI316 Body of Stainless Steel and wetted parts in AISI316 Body of Stainless Steel and wetted parts in AISI316

Watertight flanged connection with PUR cable. Threaded process connection ISO 228-G1/2A. IP686bar. GT403can have cable up to 60meters of type PUR-cable with following data: Maximum internal capacitance: Ci = 120nF/km Maximum internal inductance: Li = 1.7mH/km Connection box with lid and cable gland. Flanged process connection with large diaphragm facing cargo. IP66/67 Standard DIN power connector. Threaded process connection ISO 228-G1/2A. IP66 Connection box with lid and cable gland. Threaded process connection ISO 228-G1/2A.IP66/67 Watertight flanged connection with PUR cable. Threaded process connection ISO 228-G1/2A. IP686bar. GT423 can have cable up to 60meters of type PUR-cable with following data: Maximum internal capacitance: Ci = 120nF/km Maximum internal inductance: Li = 1.7mH/km

This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included. Postal address: P.O.Box 73 Blindern N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address: Gaustadalléen 30 0373 OSLO

Telephone: +47 22 96 03 30 Fax: +47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number: NO 974404532

Nemko 02ATEX119X Issue 4

Date: 2012-06-28

Page 3 of 5

Safety Data Input terminals 1 and 2 Maximum input voltage. Maximum input current. Maximum input power. Maximum internal capacitance. Maximum internal inductance.

Ui: Ii: Pi: Ci: Li:

28V 150mA 0,85W 22nF 4H

Certificate History and Associated Nemko Reports Issue Date Report Description 0 2002-05-27 200206132 Prime Certificate released 1 2005-12-12 55474 Various technical changes and changes of documentation 2 2010-06-08 134876 Various technical changes and changes of documentation. 3 2011-07-11 180570 Descriptive documents updated. 4 2012-06-28 204393 Update to new standards EN 60079-0: 2009, EN 60079-11: 2007 and three new variants models GT420, GT422 and GT423

This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included. Postal address: P.O.Box 73 Blindern N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address: Gaustadalléen 30 0373 OSLO

Telephone: +47 22 96 03 30 Fax: +47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number: NO 974404532

Nemko 02ATEX119X Issue 4

Date: 2012-06-28

Page 4 of 5

Descriptive Documents Title Lasertagging GT40-/-- Detail drawing

Number E-2635

Rev. F

Date 19.04.2012

Pressure transmitters type series GT400/- Installation in hazardous area external connection diagram

GT-1311

F

19.04.2012

Pressure transmitters type GT402---- Dimensional sketch

GT-1312

G

19.04.2012

Pressure transmitters type GT403---- Dimensional sketch

GT-1313

H

19.04.2012

Pressure transmitters type GT404---- Dimensional sketch

GT-1314

G

19.04.2012

Pressure transmitter GT402 Assembly drawing

GT-1316

H

19.04.2012

Pressure transmitter type GT403—AISI 316 og titan gr. 2 Assembly drawing

GT-1317

F

19.04.2012

Bill of Materials for GTB-18

GTB-18

7

04.02.2005

Bill of Materials for GTB-19

GTB-19

-

14.06.2005

Bill of Materials for GTB-20

GTB-20

1

09.02.2005

Connection drawing GTB-20

GT-1331

E

19.04.2012

Pressure transmitter type GT404 Assembly drawing GTB-17 GTB-17 GTB-16 GTB-16 Materialliste Materialliste GTB-19 side B (PCB assembly drawing) GTB-18 side B (PCB assembly drawing) GTB-18 side A (PCB assembly drawing) GTB-19 side A (PCB assembly drawing) PCB utlegg GTB-20 (GTB-18 /GTB-19) PCB utlegg GTB-20 (GTB-18 /GTB-19) Skjema GTB-18 PCB specification GTB-20 Pressure transmitters type GT420---- Dimensional sketch Pressure transmitters type GT422---- Dimensional sketch Pressure transmitters type GT423---- Dimensional sketch Pressure transmitters type GT420---- Assembly drawing Pressure transmitters type GT422---- Assembly drawing Pressure transmitters type GT423---- Assembly drawing Schematic drawing Bill of materials Schematic drawing Bill of materials PCB specification GTB-23 Instructions GT420, GT422, GT423 Instructions GT403 Instructions GT402 Instructions GT404

GT-1373 7212-322.007 7212-322.107 7212-312.007 7212-312.107 9212-312.0001 GTB-16 9212-312.0001 GTB-17 7212-361.007 7212-360.007 7212-360.107 7212-361.107 7212-360.003 7212-361.003 GT-1286 GTB-20_SPC GT-2102 GT-2103 GT-2104 GT-2105 GT-2106 GT-2107 GT-2110 7212-360.911 GT-1287 7212-361.901 7212-360.900 P-GT42X/CE P-GT403/CE P-GT402/CE P-GT404/CE

D 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 7 7 4 7 4 4 A A A A A A A A A E A A B N N J

02.02.2011 1998-04-22 1998-06-26 1998-03-18 1998-06-24 1999-04-20 1999-04-20 05.07.2007 27.01.2006 27.01.2006 27.01.2006 27.01.2006 27.01.2006 2004-11-04 18.03.2011 19.04.2012 19.04.2012 19.04.2012 19.04.2012 19.04.2012 19.04.2012 09.05.2012 09.05.2012 05.07.2007 09.05.2012 11.06.2012 27.06.2012 27.06.2012 22.06.2012 22.06.2012

This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included. Postal address: P.O.Box 73 Blindern N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address: Gaustadalléen 30 0373 OSLO

Telephone: +47 22 96 03 30 Fax: +47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number: NO 974404532

Nemko 02ATEX119X Issue 4

[16]

Report No 204393

[17]

Special Conditions for Safe Use

1. 2. 3.

[18]

Date: 2012-06-28

Page 5 of 5

The stated input values Ui, Ii, Pi are to be regarded as individual maximum values. It is a precondition that the diode safety barrier in the supply circuit has a linear resistive output characteristic. When installing titanium sensors special caution must be taken to avoid ignition hazard due to impact or friction. GT403 and GT423 are delivered with a cable end up 60meters of type PUR-cable with up to 102µH inductance and up to 7,2nF capacitance. The inductance and capacitance of the cable length the comes with the transmitter shall be added to Li:4µH and Ci:22nF of the transmitter listed on page 3 under Safety Data. .

Essential Health and Safety Requirements See item 9

This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included. Postal address: P.O.Box 73 Blindern N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address: Gaustadalléen 30 0373 OSLO

Telephone: +47 22 96 03 30 Fax: +47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number: NO 974404532

Page 1 of 4 PROD 001

[1] EC-TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE [2] Equipment or Protected System Intended for use in Potentially explosive atmospheres Directive 94/9/EC [3]

EC-Type Examination Certificate Number:

Nemko 09ATEX1133X Issue 2

[4] [5] [6]

Equipment or Protective System: Applicant/ Manufacturer: Address:

GC-300 Cargo Temperature Transmitters Kongsberg Maritime AS Haakon VIIs gt. 4 N-7005 Trondheim, Norway

[7]

This equipment or protective system and any acceptable variation thereto is specified in the schedule to this certificate and the documents therein referred to.

[8]

Nemko AS, notified body number 0470 in accordance with Article 9 of Council Directive 94/9/EC of 23 March 1994, certifies that this equipment or protective system has been found to comply with the Essential Health and Safety requirements relating to the design and construction of equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex II to the Directive. The examination and test results are recorded in confidential report no. 192397

[9]

Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with: EN 60079-0: 2009, EN 60079-11: 2007 and EN 60079-26: 2004

[10]

If the sign “X” is placed after the certificate number, it indicates that the equipment or protective system is subject to special conditions for safe use specified in the schedule to this certificate.

[11]

This EC-TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE relates only to the design, examination and tests of the specified equipment or protective system in accordance to the directive 94/9/EC. Further requirements of the Directive apply to the manufacturing process and supply of this equipment or protective system. These are not covered by this certificate.

[12] The marking of the equipment or protective system shall include the following:

II 1 G

Ex ia IIC T4 Ta: -45°°C ≤ Ta ≤ +85°°C

Oslo, 2013-06-07 This is a revised version of certificate dated 2013-04-25. Descriptive documents list and Issue 1 date corrected.

Asle Kaastad Certification Manager, Ex-products

This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included. Postal address: P.O.Box 73 Blindern N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address: Gaustadalléen 30 0373 OSLO

Telephone: +47 22 96 03 30 Fax: +47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number: NO 974404532

Nemko 09ATEX1133X Issue 2

Date: 2013-06-07

Page 2 of 4

[13] Schedule [14] [15]

EC-TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE No

Nemko 09ATEX1133X Issue 2

Description of Equipment or Protective System The GC-300 is a triple input Pt100 or Pt1000 temperature transmitter with Hart output, primarily intended for use on cargo tanks. The transmitter is placed in a stainless steel enclosure and shall be supplied from a barrier with the appropriate safety parameters. The GC-306 are six input Pt100, Pt500 or Pt1000 temperature transmitter with Hart output, primarily intended for use on cargo tanks onboard i.e. oil- , product- and chemical tankers. GC-306 is supplied from a barrier with the appropriate safety parameters. Type Designations GC-300 Safety parameters. Terminals X4. P1, p2 (HART) Maximum input voltage. Maximum input current. Maximum input power. Maximum internal capacitance. Maximum internal inductance.

Ui: Ii: Pi: Ci : Li:

28V DC 160mA 850mW 10nF Negligible

U o: I o: P o: Co: Lo:

28V DC 52mA 0,36W 83nF 15mH

Terminals X1, X2 & X3. P1, p2, p3, p4 Maximum output voltage. Maximum output current. Maximum output power. Maximum external capacitance. Maximum external inductance. Type Designations GC-306 Safety parameters. Terminals X8. P1, p2 (HART) Maximum input voltage. Ui: 28V DC Maximum input current. Ii: 160mA Maximum input power. Pi: 850mW Maximum internal capacitance. Ci : 19nF Maximum internal inductance. Li: Negligible Terminals X1, X2, X3, X4, X5 & X6. P1, p2, p3, p4, p5, p6

This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included. Postal address: P.O.Box 73 Blindern N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address: Gaustadalléen 30 0373 OSLO

Telephone: +47 22 96 03 30 Fax: +47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number: NO 974404532

Nemko 09ATEX1133X Issue 2 Maximum output voltage. Maximum output current. Maximum output power. Maximum external capacitance. Maximum external inductance.

[16]

U o: I o: P o: Co: Lo:

Date: 2013-06-07

Page 3 of 4

28V DC 60mA 0,42W 83nF 15mH

Report No. 192397 Certificate History and Associated Nemko Reports Issue 0 1 2

Date 2009-06-23 2013-04-23 2013-04-25

Report 119316 206578 192397

Description Prime Certificate released Minor change which do not affect safety. Revised documents. Adding two variant types GC-300 (electronic board GCB-303) & GC-306 (electronic board GCB-306). The new el.board GCB-303 will supersedes the old board of GCB-300 for type GC-300.

Descriptive Documents Name/Number

Rev.

E-2692

B

Date (yyyy-mm-dd) 17.12.2012

GCB-303_7212-475EtchLayers GC-228 7212-475.901 GC-217

0

11.10.2012

A A E

11.10.2012 11.10.2012 23.11.2012

GC-218

G

03.08.2011

7212-475.900 Buildup 04 Layer Standard GL-2513 GC-225 E-2719 GCB-306_7212-474EtchLayer GC-227 7212-474.901 368251

A C B A 0000

11.10.2012 11.04.2001 12.11.2012 22.11.2012 02.01.2013 12.10.2012

A A A

12.10.2012 17.12.2012 19.12.2012

368252

A

19.12.2012

7212-474.900 BuildUP_6layer_GCB-306

A -

12.10.2012 13.09.2012

Title/Description

Sheets

Laser tagging for termperature transmitter type GC-300 PCB layout

1

Circuit diagram Bill of material GC-300 connection box for temperature. Assembly drawing. GC-300 Temperature transmitter box. Dimensional sketch. PCB specification PCB Build up Safety control drawing GCB-300 Potted. Label for temperature transmitter type GC-306 PCB Layout

1 3 1

Circuit diagram Bill of materials GC-306 connection box for temperature. Assembly drawing. GC-306 Temperature transmitter box. Dimensional sketch. PCB specification PCB build up

This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included. Postal address: P.O.Box 73 Blindern N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address: Gaustadalléen 30 0373 OSLO

Telephone: +47 22 96 03 30 Fax: +47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number: NO 974404532

4

1 1 1 1 1 1 6 1 4 1 1 1 1

Nemko 09ATEX1133X Issue 2 380109 [17]

A

14.01.2013

Date: 2013-06-07

Safety control drawing

Page 4 of 4 1

Special Conditions for Safe Use Model GC-306 is made without a complete enclosure and has to be installed in an enclosure that satisfies the following clauses: -

The degree of protection of minimum IP54 according to IEC 60529 for outdoor mounting.

-

Complies with “Material composition” requirements in EN 60079-0, clause 8.1 for EPL Ga; Materials used in the construction of enclosures of Group II electrical equipment for the identified equipment protection levels shall not contain, by mass, more than: 10 % in total of aluminium, magnesium, titanium and zirconium, and 7,5 % in total of magnesium, titanium and zirconium.

-

[18]

The need for equipotential connection of the metal enclosure shall be observed.

Essential Health and Safety Requirements See item 9

This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included. Postal address: P.O.Box 73 Blindern N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY

Office address: Gaustadalléen 30 0373 OSLO

Telephone: +47 22 96 03 30 Fax: +47 22 96 05 50

Enterprise number: NO 974404532